WO2015019819A1 - Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device - Google Patents

Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015019819A1
WO2015019819A1 PCT/JP2014/069023 JP2014069023W WO2015019819A1 WO 2015019819 A1 WO2015019819 A1 WO 2015019819A1 JP 2014069023 W JP2014069023 W JP 2014069023W WO 2015019819 A1 WO2015019819 A1 WO 2015019819A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
carbon atoms
substituent
general formula
resin composition
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/069023
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
陽祐 村上
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2015019819A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015019819A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B29/00Monoazo dyes prepared by diazotising and coupling
    • C09B29/32Monoazo dyes prepared by diazotising and coupling from coupling components containing a reactive methylene group
    • C09B29/33Aceto- or benzoylacetylarylides
    • C09B29/335Aceto- or benzoylacetylarylides free of acid groups
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B57/00Other synthetic dyes of known constitution
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • G02B5/223Absorbing filters containing organic substances, e.g. dyes, inks or pigments

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a colored photosensitive resin composition suitable for producing a color filter used for a liquid crystal display element (LCD), a solid-state imaging element (CCD, CMOS, etc.), and a colored region produced by the composition.
  • the present invention relates to a color filter having a color filter, a solid-state imaging device having the color filter, and an image display device such as an organic LED liquid crystal display device.
  • a pigment is generally used.
  • the coloring compositions described in Patent Documents 1 to 3 are disclosed.
  • the crosstalk (mixture of light) is reduced by making the color filter thinner, but it is required to make the film thinner while maintaining the spectral shape, so it is required to greatly increase the pigment concentration in the solid content. It is done.
  • the content of components necessary for lithography is relatively small, and pattern formation tends to be difficult.
  • the present invention solves such a problem, and it is possible to obtain a good dispersion with a small amount of a dispersing agent, and good lithography (resolution), pattern linearity, and the same color pixels between patterns.
  • the present invention relates to a colored photosensitive resin composition excellent in stability and luminance unevenness, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored photosensitive resin composition.
  • the present inventors have found that the above-described problems can be solved by using a predetermined pigment and a predetermined dye derivative. Specifically, the above-mentioned problem has been solved by the following means ⁇ 1>, preferably ⁇ 2> to ⁇ 15>.
  • Photosensitive resin composition a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment, (B-1) a dye derivative represented by the following general formula (I) and / or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by the following general formula (II),
  • Coloring containing C) a dispersant, (D) a photopolymerization initiator, and (E) a polymerizable compound, wherein the content of (C) the dispersant is 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • Photosensitive resin composition
  • Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue
  • X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 —, or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —.
  • Y 2 represents an optionally substituted alkylene group or arylene group
  • Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—
  • Z represents a hydroxyl group when n represents 1
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 4 hydroxyl case each represent an alkoxy group or a group of the following formula (III)
  • R 1 or R 2 are each represents an alkyl group optionally having a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 May combine with each other to form a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom.
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 6
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4.
  • n 2 or more, the plurality of X, Y 1 , R 1 , and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—.
  • R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom.
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 6.
  • Dye represents an optionally substituted quinophthalone residue
  • X 1 represents —NR′SO 2 —, —SO 2 NR′—, —CONR′—, —CH 2 NR′COCH 2 NR′— or —NR′CO—
  • X 2 may have a substituent, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent Represents a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and these groups are bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO—. May be.
  • X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—.
  • R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present.
  • a and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n —R 8 , —OR 9 , —NR 10 R 11 represents a group selected from —Cl, —F and —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, R 9 , R 10 R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent.
  • a and B is a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n—R 8 , —OR 9 or — NR 10 R 11 and t represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , A, and B may be the same or different.
  • Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—
  • Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-.
  • R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present
  • R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may contain a further nitrogen atom, oxygen atom or sulfur atom, or may have a substituent.
  • Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ′′ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ′′ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent.
  • R ′ and R ′′ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent.
  • the yellow pigment is C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 and / or C.I. I.
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition according to ⁇ 2> which is CI Pigment Yellow 185.
  • the dispersant is obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic acid anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride, according to ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition in any one.
  • Dye in the general formula (I) has a monoazo dye structure having a benzimidazolone skeleton.
  • each of R ′ and R ′′ is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • a and B represent a group represented by the general formula (1) or a group represented by the general formula (2), and are the same group, ⁇ 1> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of to ⁇ 6>. ⁇ 8> (A) The zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment is C.I. I. The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, which is CI Pigment Green 58.
  • ⁇ 9> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the total amount of the colorant relative to the total solid content in the composition is 40% by mass or more.
  • ⁇ 10> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>, which is used for forming a colored region of a color filter.
  • ⁇ 11> A cured film obtained by curing the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>.
  • ⁇ 12> A step of applying the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10> on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer, and a colored photosensitive resin composition layer
  • a method for producing a color filter which comprises a step of exposing the substrate to a pattern and a step of developing and removing unexposed portions to form a colored pattern.
  • ⁇ 13> A step of applying the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10> on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer and curing to form a colored layer , Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
  • a method for producing a color filter comprising: a step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern; and a step of dry etching a colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
  • ⁇ 15> A solid-state imaging device or an image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 14>.
  • the present invention since a good dispersion can be obtained even if the content of the dispersant is small, excellent lithography (resolution), pattern linearity, stability between pixels of the same color in the pattern, and luminance unevenness are excellent. It has become possible to provide a colored photosensitive resin composition, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored photosensitive resin composition.
  • the organic EL element in the present invention refers to an organic electroluminescence element.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored photosensitive resin composition.
  • the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. In the present invention, light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • exposure in this specification is not only exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Are also included in the exposure.
  • (meth) acrylate represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acryl represents both and / or acryl and “(meth) acrylic”
  • "Acryloyl” represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous.
  • the monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less.
  • the polymerizable compound means a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • the polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
  • a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by GPC measurement.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and TSKgel Super AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6) as a column.
  • 0.0 mm ID ⁇ 15.0 cm can be determined by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as the eluent.
  • Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Pr represents a propyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group
  • process is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
  • This invention is made
  • composition of the present invention Colored photosensitive resin composition of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “composition of the present invention” or “colored composition”)
  • A a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment
  • B-1 a dye derivative represented by the general formula (I) and / or
  • B-2) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (II)
  • C a dispersant
  • D a photopolymerization initiator
  • E a polymerizable compound
  • content of (C) the dispersant is: 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of pigment.
  • composition of the present invention By using the composition of the present invention, a good dispersion can be obtained even if the content of the dispersant is reduced to 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. In addition, pattern linearity, stability between pixels of the same color in the pattern, and luminance unevenness are improved. The reason why the effects of the present invention can be obtained is not clear, but depends on the fact that the planarity of the molecular structure of the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine used as the pigment is higher than that of non-halogenated phthalocyanine, copper phthalocyanine, etc. It is thought that there is.
  • the pigment can be dispersed even with a small amount of the dispersant because the higher the planarity of the molecule is more easily adsorbed when the dispersant is dispersed by the interaction.
  • the (B) dye derivative used in the present invention has a triazine structure, and the triazine structure strongly adsorbs to a compound having high planarity. Therefore, the zinc halide phthalocyanine having high planarity depends on the dye derivative. It is strongly adsorbed. As a result, it is presumed that a very good dispersion with a low content of dispersant can be obtained.
  • the composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the present invention includes (A) a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment.
  • the substituents substituted on the phthalocyanine skeleton are only halogen atoms, and a total of at least two halogen atoms are bonded per phthalocyanine molecule (structure) in a maximum of 16 pieces. It is a structural pigment.
  • the halogen atom preferably contains at least one of a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, more preferably a chlorine atom and / or a bromine atom, and further preferably contains both a chlorine atom and a bromine atom.
  • X 1 to X 16 each represent a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or a hydrogen atom, and at least two of X 1 to X 16 are a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • the hue of the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment changes from blue to green.
  • the halogen atom bonded to the molecule has 8 or more bromine atoms, and among them, having 12 or more bromine atoms is more yellowish. It is more preferable in terms of developing a high green color. It is preferable that more bromine atoms are contained than chlorine atoms in order to obtain a more yellowish green color.
  • the number of bromine atoms substituted is more preferably 10 to 14. Further, among X 1 to X 16 , two or less of those taking a hydrogen atom are preferable.
  • the zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment used in the present invention is preferably a zinc halide phthalocyanine having an average primary particle diameter of 0.01 to 0.30 ⁇ m.
  • the average particle diameter of the primary particles of the pigment in the present invention is a value measured by the following method.
  • the average primary particle diameter in the present invention is the longer one of 100 primary particles of a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment constituting an aggregate on a two-dimensional image obtained by photographing particles in the field of view with a transmission electron microscope. The average value of the diameter (major axis) and the shorter diameter (minor axis) is obtained and averaged.
  • the composition of the present invention only one kind of zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment may be used, or a plurality of kinds may be used in combination.
  • a plurality of types of polyhalogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments having a specific halogen atom composition each having a different number of substitutions of halogen atoms selected from bromine atoms and chlorine atoms, are contained in a specific ratio. It may be a thing.
  • Preferable embodiments include a combination of a polyhalogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment containing 16 bromine atoms and a polyhalogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment containing 15 bromine atoms and one chlorine atom.
  • the ratio of the two is preferably in the range of 80:20 to 100: 0.
  • the average composition of the (A) zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment contained in the curable composition of the present invention is determined by mass spectrometry based on mass spectroscopy and halogen content analysis by flask combustion ion chromatography, Similarly, the mole% of each specific zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment contained in the pigment composition can be easily determined by analyzing the results of mass spectrometry.
  • the zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment that can be suitably used in the present invention can be produced by the method described in JP-A-2007-320986 and JP-A-2008-19383.
  • halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment C.I. I. And CI Pigment Green 58.
  • the amount of the zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment in the composition of the present invention is preferably 20 to 100% by mass of the total pigment component, more preferably 30 to 90% by mass, and 40 to 80% by mass. Is more preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a pigment other than the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment. Specifically, those described in JP-A-2012-219106, paragraphs 0046 to 0052 can be adopted, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. In the present invention, a yellow pigment is preferred. Other pigments may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • organic pigments examples include azo pigments, azomethine pigments, isoindoline pigments, and quinophthalone pigments. Of these, azo pigments and isoindoline pigments are preferred for the reason of dispersion stability.
  • C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 (azo pigment)
  • C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139,185 isoindoline pigment
  • the other pigment used in the present invention preferably has one or two ring structures in the molecule constituting the other pigment.
  • the condensed ring has one ring structure as a whole. Since pigments having one or two ring structures have a smaller intermolecular interaction direction than pigments having three or more ring structures, it is considered that the pigments can be easily released during dispersion (particulate formation). In addition, when the number of particles increases due to the dissolution of the pigment, adsorption to the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment is likely to occur. Presumably effective in viscosity stability (inhibition of thickening).
  • the pigment having one or two ring structures in the molecule constituting the pigment is preferably a yellow pigment. I. Pigment yellow 150, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 is more preferable.
  • composition of the present invention may contain (A) a known dye other than the pigment.
  • A a known dye other than the pigment.
  • a known dye other than the pigment for example, JP-A-64-90403, JP-A-64-91102, JP-A-1-94301, JP-A-6-11614, Tokuho 2592207, U.S. Pat. No. 4,808,501, U.S. Pat. No. 5, U.S. Pat. No. 505950, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6-51115, JP-A-6-194828, etc. Can be used.
  • the chemical structure includes pyrazole azo, pyromethene, anilinoazo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, etc.
  • Dyes can be used.
  • a dye multimer may be used as the dye. Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A and JP2013-041097A.
  • the content of the pigment in the composition of the present invention is preferably 40% by mass or more based on the total amount of the phthalocyanine pigment and other pigments, excluding the solvent contained in the colored photosensitive resin composition.
  • the amount is preferably 45 to 70% by mass, and more preferably 50 to 65% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a dye within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention. When the dye is included, the total of the colorants (dye and pigment) is preferably within the above range. Only one kind of pigment may be contained in the composition of the present invention, or two or more kinds thereof may be contained. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention comprises (B-1) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (I) and / or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (II) as the dye derivative (B). Including.
  • (B-1) the dye derivative represented by the general formula (I) and (B-2) the dye derivative represented by the general formula (II) will be described.
  • Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue
  • X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 —, or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —.
  • Y 2 represents an optionally substituted alkylene group or arylene group
  • Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—
  • Z represents a hydroxyl group when n represents 1
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 4 hydroxyl case each represent an alkoxy group or a group of the following formula (III)
  • R 1 or R 2 are each represents an alkyl group optionally having a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 May combine with each other to form a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom.
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 6
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4.
  • n 2 or more, the plurality of X, Y 1 , R 1 , and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—.
  • R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom.
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 6.
  • Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue.
  • the organic dye residue include a chromogenic group in the pigment as described above, a similar structure, or a partial structure thereof.
  • a skeleton having an azo group a skeleton having a urea structure, a skeleton having an amide structure
  • Examples include a structure containing one or more partial structures selected from a skeleton having a cyclic amide structure, an aromatic ring having a heteroatom-containing 5-membered ring, and an aromatic ring having a heteroatom-containing 6-membered ring, and Dye Is a substituent containing these organic dye residues.
  • the dye preferably has a pigment mother nucleus structure, or a pigment mother nucleus structure and an aromatic ring, a nitrogen-containing aromatic ring, an oxygen-containing aromatic ring, or a sulfur-containing aromatic ring, and the amino group has a pigment mother nucleus structure, an aromatic ring It is bonded directly or through a linking group to any of the ring, nitrogen-containing aromatic ring, oxygen-containing aromatic ring and sulfur-containing aromatic ring.
  • quinoline residue benzimidazolone residue, isoindoline residue, diketopyrrolopyrrole residue, azo residue, phthalocyanine residue, anthraquinone residue, quinacridone residue , Dioxazine residues, perinone residues, perylene residues, thioindigo residues, isoindolinone residues, quinophthalone residues, selenium residues, metal complex residues and the like.
  • organic dye residue represented by Dye include a copper phthalocyanine residue and the following organic dye residues.
  • * represents a binding site with X in the general formula (I).
  • monoazo dyes having a benzimidazolone skeleton are preferable.
  • X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 — or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —, and preferably a single bond.
  • Y 2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group which may have a substituent.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, and a hexylene group.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • the arylene group is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
  • the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—, preferably —NH—.
  • R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 preferably represent an alkyl group which may have the same substituent.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • Z is a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a group represented by the above general formula (III), or —NH—X—Dye (where X is the same as X in the general formula (I)) when n represents 1.
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 4, each represents a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or a group represented by the above general formula (III).
  • Z is preferably a group represented by the above general formula (III) or —NH—X-Dye, and more preferably a group represented by the above general formula (III).
  • Z is preferably a group represented by the above general formula (III).
  • Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—, preferably —NH—.
  • Y 3 preferably represents the same group as Y 1 in formula (I).
  • R 1 and R 2 are in the formula (III), represents an optionally substituted alkyl group has the same meaning as R 1 and R 2 in formula (I), and preferred ranges are also the same .
  • R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (III) preferably represent an alkyl group which may have the same substituent.
  • R ⁇ 1 > and R ⁇ 2 > in general formula (III) represent the alkyl group which may have the same substituent as R ⁇ 1 > and R ⁇ 2 > in general formula (I).
  • M represents an integer of 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • m preferably represents the same integer as m in formula (I).
  • Dye represents an optionally substituted quinophthalone residue
  • X 1 represents —NR′SO 2 —, —SO 2 NR′—, —CONR′—, —CH 2 NR′COCH 2 NR′— or —NR′CO—
  • X 2 may have a substituent, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent Represents a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and these groups are bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO—. May be.
  • X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—.
  • R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present.
  • a and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n —R 8 , —OR 9 , —NR 10 R 11 represents a group selected from —Cl, —F and —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, R 9 , R 10 R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent.
  • a and B is a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n—R 8 , —OR 9 or — NR 10 R 11 and t represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , A, and B may be the same or different.
  • Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—
  • Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-.
  • R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present
  • R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may contain a further nitrogen atom, oxygen atom or sulfur atom, or may have a substituent.
  • Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ′′ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ′′ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent.
  • R ′ and R ′′ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent.
  • Dye represents the quinophthalone residue which may have a substituent.
  • the quinophthalone residue is specifically represented by the following general formula (II-1).
  • D and E each have a substituent formed with a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a benzene ring to which D and E are bonded.
  • R ′ and R ′′ is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • p represents an integer of 0 to 4, and q represents an integer calculated by 4-p.
  • * Represents a binding site with X 1 in the general formula (II).
  • D and E are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent formed together with a benzene ring to which D and E are bonded;
  • R ′ and R ′′ are each a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituted group.
  • An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group.
  • the aromatic ring group or the heterocyclic group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a thiophene ring group, a pyridine ring group, and a pyrrole ring group.
  • the aromatic or heterocyclic group represented by D and E the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, the alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms and the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R ′ and R ′′ are: It may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent. Among these, it is preferable that D and E are a hydrogen atom and a halogen atom.
  • P represents an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and still more preferably 4.
  • q represents an integer calculated by 4-p, specifically, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 2 to 3, and still more preferably 4.
  • the binding site with X 1 in the general formula (II) is not particularly limited, but the 5th or 8th position of the quinoline skeleton in the quinophthalone residue is preferably a binding site, and the 8th position is a binding site. Is more preferable.
  • X 1 is, -NR'SO 2 -, - SO 2 NR '-, - CONR' -, - CH 2 NR'COCH 2 NR'-, or -NR'CO- represent, —NR′SO 2 — is preferred.
  • t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 may be the same or different.
  • R ′ in X 1 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Alternatively, it represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and a hydrogen atom is preferable.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group.
  • the alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples include a vinyl group, a propenyl group, a butenyl group, a pentenyl group, and a hexenyl group.
  • the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and specific examples include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthracenyl group. These may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • X 2 is an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a heteroaromatic ring having 4 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. And these groups may be bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO— (R ′ represents the above X 1). It is synonymous with R ′ in the middle, and the preferred range is also the same.).
  • R ′ represents the above X 1). It is synonymous with R ′ in the middle, and the preferred range is also the same.).
  • the plurality of X 2 may be the same or different.
  • the arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and specific examples thereof include a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
  • the heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, and specific examples include a thiophene ring group, a pyridine ring group, and a pyrrole ring group. These may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—, preferably —NR′—.
  • t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 3 may be the same or different.
  • R ′ has the same meaning as R ′ above, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • a and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1) or the following general formula (2), -O- (CH 2 ) n -R 8, -OR 9, -NR 10 R 11, - Represents a group selected from Cl, —F or —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, and one of A and B is a group represented by the following formula (1) or (2), —O -(CH 2 ) n-R 8 , -OR 9 , or -NR 10 R 11 .
  • a and B are preferably groups represented by the following general formula (1) or the following general formula (2), and A and B are represented by the following general formula (1) or the following general formula (2). More preferably, A and B are the same group.
  • R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, and specific examples thereof include a pyrrole ring residue and a pyridine ring residue.
  • R 9 , R 10 and R 11 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group or a substituent.
  • R 9 , R 10 and R 11 have the same meaning as R ′ described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—
  • Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-.
  • R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. (R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may further contain a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, or may have a substituent. .
  • Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—, preferably —NR′—.
  • R ′ has the same meaning as R ′ above, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • Y 2 may have an optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted group. And an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, which are bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 —, and —CO—.
  • R ′ has the same meaning as R ′ above, and the preferred range is also the same).
  • the alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and further preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, and a hexylene group.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • the alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and further preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include vinylene group, propynylene group, butynylene group, pentynylene group, hexynylene group and the like.
  • the alkenylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • the arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substitu
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may further contain a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, or may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples include a vinyl group, a propenyl group, a butenyl group, a pentenyl group, and a hexenyl group. These groups may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 preferably represent the same group.
  • Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ′′ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ′′ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent.
  • R ′ and R ′′ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent.
  • Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, N R′—G—CONR ′′ —, —NR′—G—SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ′′ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, It represents —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 NR′—, and preferably a single bond.
  • R ′ and R ′′ are each a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, Alternatively, it represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R ′ and R ′′ are synonymous with R ′ in the general formula (1), and preferred ranges thereof are also the same.
  • G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an optionally substituted carbon. It represents an arylene group having a number of 6 to 20.
  • G has the same meaning as Y 2 in the general formula (1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent. Represents an alkenyl group having ⁇ 20 or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 have the same meaning as R ′ in the general formula (1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • R 7 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 7 has the same meaning as R 1 in the general formula (1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • T in the general formula (II) represents an integer of 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
  • the content of the (B) pigment derivative in the present invention is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and preferably 1 part by mass or more and 25 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the phthalocyanine pigment and other pigments. It is more preferable that the amount is not more than part by mass. Only 1 type may be contained in the composition of this invention, and 2 or more types may be contained for the pigment derivative. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention contains (C) a dispersant, and the content of the dispersant is 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the content of the (C) dispersant is preferably 22 to 38 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 35 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the phthalocyanine pigment and other pigments.
  • Only 1 type of dispersing agent may be contained in the composition of this invention, and may be contained 2 or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • dispersant examples include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (Meth) acrylic copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine, alkanol amine, and pigment derivatives. it can.
  • the polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer according to the structure.
  • Examples of the terminal-modified polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polymer having a phosphate group at the terminal described in JP-A-3-112992, JP-A-2003-533455, and the like. Examples thereof include polymers having a sulfonic acid group at the terminal end described in JP-A-273191 and the like, and polymers having a partial skeleton of an organic dye and a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-9-77994. In addition, polymers having two or more pigment surface anchor sites (acid groups, basic groups, organic dye partial skeletons, heterocycles, etc.) introduced at the polymer ends described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also available. It is preferable because of excellent dispersion stability.
  • Examples of the graft polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polyester-based dispersant, and specific examples thereof include JP-A-54-37082, JP-A-8-507960, Reaction products of poly (lower alkyleneimine) and polyester described in JP-A-2009-258668, etc., reaction products of polyallylamine and polyester described in JP-A-9-169821, etc., JP-A-10-339949 A copolymer of a macromonomer and a nitrogen atom monomer described in JP-A-2004-37986, International Publication Pamphlet WO 2010/110491, JP-A-2003-238837, JP-A-2008-9426, JP-A Graphs having partial skeletons and heterocyclic rings of organic dyes described in JP-A-2008-81732 Type polymer, and a copolymer of a macromonomer and acid group-containing monomers described in JP 2010-106268 Publication.
  • amphoteric dispersion resin having a basic group and an acidic group described in JP-A-2009-203462 is a dispersibility of a pigment dispersion, a dispersion stability, and a colored photosensitive resin composition using the pigment dispersion. It is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of developability.
  • Macromonomer AA-6 (terminal) manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd. Polymethyl methacrylate having a methacryloyl group), AS-6 (polystyrene having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AN-6S (a copolymer of styrene and acrylonitrile having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AB-6 ( Polybutyl acrylate whose end group is a methacryloyl group), Plaxel FM5 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • polyester-based macromonomer described in the 2009 publication.
  • the polyester-based macromonomer that is particularly excellent in flexibility and solvophilicity is from the viewpoint of the dispersibility of the pigment dispersion, the dispersion stability, and the developability exhibited by the colored photosensitive resin composition using the pigment dispersion.
  • Particularly preferred is a polyester macromonomer represented by the polyester macromonomer described in JP-A-2-272009.
  • block polymers having an anchor site to the pigment surface block polymers described in JP-A Nos. 2003-49110 and 2009-52010 are preferable.
  • the dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples thereof include “DA-7301” manufactured by Kashiwagi Kasei Co., Ltd. and “Disperbyk-101 (polyamideamine phosphate) manufactured by BYK Chemie.
  • These dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant.
  • the pigment dispersant may be used in combination with an alkali-soluble resin together with a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, or a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface.
  • Alkali-soluble resins include (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partially esterified maleic acid copolymer, etc., and carboxylic acid in the side chain.
  • the dispersant (C) in particular, a dispersant obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride is used. preferable.
  • the dispersant obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic acid anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride will be described.
  • the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end is preferably a polymer represented by the following general formula (1).
  • the polymer represented by the general formula (1) is a vinyl polymer obtained by polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
  • Y 2 represents a polymerization termination group of the vinyl polymer
  • Z 2 represents —OH or R 28 (OH) 2
  • R 28 represents a trivalent having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • R 21 and R 22 each represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • one of R 23 and R 24 represents a hydrogen atom
  • the other represents an aromatic group, or —C ( ⁇ O) —X 6 —R 25 (where X 6 represents —O— or —N (R 26 ) —, and R 25 and R 26 each represents a hydrogen atom or a straight chain of 1 to 18 carbon atoms)
  • X 4 represents a single bond, —O—R 27 — or S—R 27 —
  • R 27 represents a linear or branched alkyl group which may have an aromatic group as a substituent.
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 50.
  • Y 2 represents a polymerization termination group of the vinyl polymer, and is any known polymerization termination group introduced when polymerization of a normal ethylenically unsaturated monomer is carried out by a usual method.
  • it can be a group derived from a polymerization initiator, a group derived from a chain transfer agent, a group derived from a solvent, or a group derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer. Even if Y 2 has any of these chemical structures, the dispersant of the present invention can exert its effect without being affected by the polymerization termination group Y 2 .
  • the polymerization termination group include a carboxylic acid residue and an alcohol residue, and a carboxylic acid residue is preferable.
  • Z 2 represents —OH or R 28 (OH) 2 and is preferably —OH.
  • R 28 represents a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • R 28 is preferably a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and further preferably a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the trivalent hydrocarbon group three hydrogen atoms are removed from a saturated hydrocarbon molecule having 1 to 18 carbon atoms such as methane, ethane, propane, 2-methylpropane, butane, cycloheptane, and cyclohexane.
  • R 21 and R 22 each represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 23 and R 24 represents a hydrogen atom and the other one is an aromatic group, or —C ( ⁇ O) —X 6 —R 25 (where X 6 represents —O— or —N (R 26 ) —
  • the aromatic group is preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthracenyl group.
  • X 6 represents —O— or —N (R 26 ) —, and each of R 25 and R 26 has a hydrogen atom or a linear or branched group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and has an aromatic group as a substituent.
  • the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the aromatic group as a substituent of the alkyl group is preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further an aromatic group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. preferable. Specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, etc. are mentioned.
  • X 4 represents a single bond, —O—R 27 — or S—R 27 —, preferably S—R 27 —.
  • R 27 represents a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, an isopropylene group, a butylene group, an isobutylene group, a pentylene group, and a hexylene group.
  • N represents an integer of 2 to 50, preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 30.
  • the part of the repeating unit of the polymer represented by the general formula (1), that is, ⁇ — [C (R 21 ) (R 23 ) —C (R 22 ) (R 24 )] n — ⁇ is mutually identical (Homopolymer) made of a different material or (copolymer) made of a different material.
  • R 21 and R 22 are either a hydrogen atom, the other is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 23 and R 24 are either One is a hydrogen atom and the other is —C ( ⁇ O) —O—R 29 (R 29 is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and has an aromatic group as a substituent.
  • —X 4 —Z 2 is —S—CH 2 CH 2 —OH or —S—CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 —OH.
  • the method for producing the polymer represented by the general formula (1) can be referred to the description in paragraphs 0044 to 0060 of Japanese Patent No. 5117913 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-251481), the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Tricarboxylic anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include an aliphatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride or an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride.
  • Examples of the aliphatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride include 3-carboxymethylglutaric acid anhydride, 1,2,4-butanetricarboxylic acid-1,2-anhydride, cis-propene-1,2,3-tricarboxylic acid- 1,2-anhydride, 1,3,4-cyclopentanetricarboxylic acid anhydride and the like.
  • aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride examples include benzene tricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,3-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride, trimellitic acid anhydride (1,2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride), etc.), Naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,4-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,4,5-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3,6-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,2,8-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid Acid anhydride, etc.), 3,4,4′-benzophenone tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4′-biphenyl ether tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4′-biphenyl tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2′-biphenyltricarboxylic acid anhydride,
  • an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride is preferable among the above.
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include aliphatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, and polycyclic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides.
  • Examples of the aliphatic tetracarboxylic dianhydride include 1,2,3,4-butanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, and 1,3-dimethyl.
  • aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include pyromellitic dianhydride, ethylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, propylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, butylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, 3, 3 ', 4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2', 3,3'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ', 4,4'-biphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride 2,2 ′, 3,3′-biphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride Anhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyl ether tetracarboxylic dianhydride
  • polycyclic tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include 3,4-dicarboxy-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphthalene succinic dianhydride, 3,4-dicarboxy-1,2 , 3,4-tetrahydro-6-methyl-1-naphthalene succinic dianhydride.
  • aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferable among the above.
  • the tricarboxylic acid anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride used in the present invention is not limited to the compounds exemplified above, and may have any structure. These may be used alone or in combination. What is preferably used in the present invention is an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride or an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride from the viewpoint of reducing the viscosity of the pigment dispersion or various inks.
  • pyromellitic dianhydride 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 9,9-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) fluorene dianhydride, 2, 3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, ethylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester and trimellitic anhydride are preferred.
  • the reaction ratio is 0.3.
  • ⁇ ⁇ H> / ⁇ N> ⁇ 3 is preferable, and more preferably 0.5 ⁇ ⁇ H> / ⁇ N> ⁇ 2.
  • a catalyst may be used for the reaction between the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end and the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride.
  • tertiary amine compounds can be used, such as triethylamine, triethylenediamine, N, N-dimethylbenzylamine, N-methylmorpholine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene. And 1,5-diazabicyclo- [4.3.0] -5-nonene.
  • the reaction between the hydroxyl group of the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end and the acid anhydride group of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride may be performed without a solvent, or an appropriate dehydrated organic solvent may be used. . After completion of the reaction, the solvent used in the reaction can be removed by an operation such as distillation, or can be used as it is as a part of the product of the dispersant.
  • the solvent used is not particularly limited, but ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, toluene, xylene, acetone, hexane, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate and the like are used. Two or more of these solvents may be used in combination.
  • the reaction temperature between the hydroxyl group of the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end and the acid anhydride group of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride is preferably 50 ° C. to 180 ° C., more preferably 60 ° C. to 160 ° C. Do. When the reaction temperature is less than 50 ° C., the reaction rate is slow. When the reaction temperature exceeds 180 ° C., the acid anhydride that has reacted and opened the ring forms a cyclic anhydride again, which may make it difficult to complete the reaction.
  • the composition of this invention contains a photoinitiator from a viewpoint of the further sensitivity improvement.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound described later, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime.
  • Examples include oxime compounds such as derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallyl-imidazole dimers, oniums
  • compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds are preferred.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, triarylimidazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, and acetophenone compounds.
  • At least one compound selected from the group consisting of a trihalomethyltriazine compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, an oxime compound, a triallylimidazole compound, a benzophenone compound, a triarylimidazole compound, and a benzimidazole compound is particularly preferable.
  • the triarylimidazole compound may be a mixture with benzimidazole.
  • examples of the trihalomethyltriazine compound include the following compounds. Note that Ph is a phenyl group.
  • Examples of the triarylimidazole compound and the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
  • a commercially available product can be used as the trihalomethyltriazine compound, for example, TAZ-107 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
  • TAZ-107 manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, in view of these points, it is most preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator (D) in order to form a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivative having a triazine skeleton examples include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3333724, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compound described in JP-A-62-258241, compound described in JP-A-5-281728, compound described in JP-A-5-34920, US Pat. No. 4,221,976 And the compounds described in the book.
  • Examples of the compound described in US Pat. No. 4,221,976 include compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton (for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- Trichloromethyl-5- (4-chlorophenyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (1-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5 -(2-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5- (2-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole; 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-chlorostyryl) ) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichlor
  • photopolymerization initiators other than those mentioned above, polyhalogen compounds (for example, 9-phenylacridine, 1,7-bis (9,9′-acridinyl) heptane, etc.), N-phenylglycine, etc.
  • polyhalogen compounds for example, 9-phenylacridine, 1,7-bis (9,9′-acridinyl) heptane, etc.
  • N-phenylglycine etc.
  • acylphosphine oxides for example, bis (2,4 , 6-Trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphos Zinc oxide, bis (2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl) -2,4,4-trimethyl-pentylphenylphosphine oxide, Lucirin TPO, etc.
  • metallocenes for example, bis ( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)- Bis (2,6-difluoro-3- (1H-pyrrol-1-yl) -phenyl) titanium, ⁇ 5-cyclopentadienyl- ⁇ 6-cumenyl-iron (1 +)-hexafluorophosphate (1-), etc.
  • Examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 53-133428, 57-1819, 57-6096, and US Pat.
  • ketone compound examples include benzophenone, 2-methylbenzophenone, 3-methylbenzophenone, 4-methylbenzophenone, 4-methoxybenzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4-chlorobenzophenone, 4-bromobenzophenone, 2-carboxybenzophenone, 2-ethoxycarbonylbenzophenone, benzophenonetetracarboxylic acid or tetramethyl ester thereof, 4,4′-bis (dialkylamino) benzophenones (eg, 4,4′-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4′-bisdicyclohexyl) Amino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis (dihydroxyethylamino) benzophenone, 4-methoxy-4'-dimethylamino Benzophenone, 4,4'-dimethoxybenzophenone, 4-dimethylaminobenzophen
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
  • hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, IRGACURE-379, IRGACURE-OXE379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 whose absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source of 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
  • acylphosphine initiator commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • More preferable examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
  • Examples of oxime compounds include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995), pp. 156-162. 202-232, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
  • IRGACURE-OXE01 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE-OXE02 manufactured by BASF
  • TR-PBG-304 manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.
  • oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N-position, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety, Compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189, a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton in the same molecule
  • a compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained therein a compound described in JP-A-2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-line light source, and the like may be used.
  • cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744 can also be suitably used for the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744.
  • cyclic oxime compounds in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2009-242469 having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound can be preferably used because high sensitivity can be achieved by regenerating the active radical from the polymerization inert radical. it can.
  • an oxime compound having a specific substituent as disclosed in JP 2007-26997A and an oxime compound having a thioaryl group as disclosed in JP 2009-191061 A can be given.
  • the oxime compound that is a photopolymerization initiator is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-1).
  • the oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
  • R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • A represents a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
  • the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group.
  • these groups may have one or more substituents.
  • the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
  • substituents examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable. Specifically, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, an octadecyl group, an isopropyl group , Isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, 1-ethylpentyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, trifluoromethyl, 2-ethylhexyl, phenacyl, 1-naphthoylmethyl, 2-naphthoyl Methyl group, 4-methylsulfanylphenacyl group, 4-phenylsulfanylphenacyl group, 4-dimethylaminophenacyl group, 4-cyanophenacyl group, 4-methylphenacyl
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and specifically includes a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, a 9-anthryl group, a 9-phenanthryl group, and a 1-pyrenyl group.
  • the acyl group is preferably an acyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically includes an acetyl group, a propanoyl group, a butanoyl group, a trifluoroacetyl group, a pentanoyl group, a benzoyl group, a 1-naphthoyl group, and a 2-naphthoyl group.
  • the alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically includes a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, a propoxycarbonyl group, a butoxycarbonyl group, a hexyloxycarbonyl group, an octyloxycarbonyl group, a decyl group. Examples thereof include an oxycarbonyl group, an octadecyloxycarbonyl group, and a trifluoromethyloxycarbonyl group.
  • aryloxycarbonyl group examples include phenoxycarbonyl group, 1-naphthyloxycarbonyl group, 2-naphthyloxycarbonyl group, 4-methylsulfanylphenyloxycarbonyl group, 4-phenylsulfanylphenyloxycarbonyl group, 4-dimethylamino.
  • heterocyclic group an aromatic or aliphatic heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a phosphorus atom is preferable.
  • thienyl group benzo [b] thienyl group, naphtho [2,3-b] thienyl group, thiantenyl group, furyl group, pyranyl group, isobenzofuranyl group, chromenyl group, xanthenyl group, phenoxathiyl Nyl group, 2H-pyrrolyl group, pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, pyridyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, pyridazinyl group, indolizinyl group, isoindolyl group, 3H-indolyl group, indolyl group, 1H-indazolyl group, purinyl group 4
  • alkylthiocarbonyl group examples include a methylthiocarbonyl group, a propylthiocarbonyl group, a butylthiocarbonyl group, a hexylthiocarbonyl group, an octylthiocarbonyl group, a decylthiocarbonyl group, an octadecylthiocarbonyl group, and a trifluoromethylthiocarbonyl group.
  • a methylthiocarbonyl group a propylthiocarbonyl group, a butylthiocarbonyl group, a hexylthiocarbonyl group, an octylthiocarbonyl group, a decylthiocarbonyl group, an octadecylthiocarbonyl group, and a trifluoromethylthiocarbonyl group.
  • arylthiocarbonyl group examples include a 1-naphthylthiocarbonyl group, a 2-naphthylthiocarbonyl group, a 4-methylsulfanylphenylthiocarbonyl group, a 4-phenylsulfanylphenylthiocarbonyl group, and a 4-dimethylaminophenylthiocarbonyl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by B represents an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
  • Y, X, and n have the same meanings as Y, X, and n in General Formula (OX-2) described later, and preferred examples are also the same.
  • examples of the divalent organic group represented by A include an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, and an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent. Among them, A in the formula (OX-1) is an unsubstituted alkylene group, an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a tert-butyl group, dodecyl) from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloring due to heating.
  • an alkyl group for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a tert-butyl group, dodecyl
  • alkylene group alkenyl group (eg vinyl group, allyl group) alkylene group, aryl group (eg phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl) Group, a phenanthryl group, and a styryl group) are preferable.
  • alkenyl group eg vinyl group, allyl group
  • aryl group eg phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl
  • a phenanthryl group e.g., phenanthryl group
  • styryl group alkylene group substituted alkylene group
  • alkenyl group eg vinyl group, allyl group
  • aryl group eg phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphth
  • the aryl group represented by Ar is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the same substituents as those introduced into the substituted aryl group mentioned above as specific examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloring due to heating.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-2).
  • R and X each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • a and Y each independently represent a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group
  • n represents 0 to It is an integer of 5.
  • R, A and Ar in the general formula (OX-2) have the same meanings as R, A and Ar in the general formula (OX-1), and preferred examples thereof are also the same.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by X includes an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amino group, and a heterocyclic ring.
  • X in the general formula (OX-2) is preferably an alkyl group from the viewpoint of solvent solubility and improvement of absorption efficiency in the long wavelength region.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 5, and an integer of 0 to 2 is preferable.
  • examples of the divalent organic group represented by Y include the following structures.
  • “*” represents a bonding position between Y and an adjacent carbon atom in the formula (OX-2).
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-3) or (OX-4).
  • R and X each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • A represents a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group
  • n represents 0 An integer of ⁇ 5.
  • R, X, A, Ar, and n in the general formula (OX-3) or (OX-4) have the same meanings as R, X, A, Ar, and n in the general formula (OX-2), respectively.
  • the preferred examples are also the same.
  • the oxime compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, preferably has an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 455 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of sensitivity. 000 is particularly preferred.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured by using a known method. Specifically, for example, in an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Inc., Cary-5 spcphotometer), an ethyl acetate solvent is used. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g / L.
  • the photopolymerization initiator used in the present invention may be used in combination of two or more as required.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator (D) in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. It is 5 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 1 mass% or more and 3 mass% or less. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
  • the composition of the present invention contains (E) a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound known polymerizable compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used, and examples thereof include polymerizable compounds containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane), methylol and the like.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably selected from compounds having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Among them, a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 4 or more functional groups is preferable, and a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 5 or more functional groups is more preferable.
  • Such compound groups are widely known in the industrial field, and these can be used without particular limitation in the present invention. These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, ie dimers, trimers and oligomers or mixtures thereof and oligomers thereof.
  • the polymeric compound in this invention may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • examples of monomers and prepolymers thereof include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters thereof, amides, And multimers thereof, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and multimers thereof. is there.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • a dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable.
  • compounds described in paragraphs [0095] to [0108] of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
  • the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group and having an ethylenically unsaturated group having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure.
  • monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri ( (Meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol ( (
  • polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and mixtures thereof.
  • a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyfunctional carboxylic acid with a compound having a cyclic ether group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated group can also be used.
  • preferable polymerizable compounds include fluorene rings described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, Japanese Patent No. 4364216, etc., and ethylenically unsaturated groups. It is also possible to use a compound having two or more functional groups, a cardo resin.
  • radically polymerizable monomers represented by the following general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) can also be suitably used.
  • T is an oxyalkylene group
  • the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.
  • n is 0 to 14 and m is 1 to 8.
  • a plurality of R and T present in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • a group represented by C (CH 3 ) ⁇ CH 2 is represented.
  • Specific examples of the polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) include compounds described in paragraphs 0248 to 0251 of JP-A-2007-2699779. It can be suitably used in the invention.
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; Nippon Kayaku) Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available) KAYARAD D-310 (commercially available product), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
  • a structure manufactured by A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and these (meth) acryloyl groups via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred.
  • These oligomer types can also be used.
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable compound are shown below.
  • the polymerizable compound is a polyfunctional monomer and may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. If the ethylenic compound has an unreacted carboxyl group as in the case of a mixture as described above, this can be used as it is. Non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides may be reacted to introduce acid groups.
  • non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride examples include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
  • the monomer having an acid group is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound.
  • a polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is preferred, Particularly preferably, in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol.
  • examples of commercially available products include M-510 and M-520 as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • a preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1 mgKOH / g to 40 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 mgKOH / g to 30 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is too low, the developing dissolution properties are lowered, and if it is too high, the production and handling are difficult, the photopolymerization performance is lowered, and the curability such as the surface smoothness of the pixel is deteriorated. Accordingly, when two or more polyfunctional monomers having different acid groups are used in combination, or when a polyfunctional monomer having no acid group is used in combination, the acid groups as the entire polyfunctional monomer should be adjusted so as to fall within the above range. Is preferred.
  • polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents a number of 1 or 2
  • “*” represents a bond
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond.
  • the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone structure can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • the polymerizable monomer that can be used in the present invention is preferably at least one selected from the group of compounds represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
  • each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) —.
  • Each represents independently an integer of 0 to 10
  • each X independently represents an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
  • the total of the acryloyl group and the methacryloyl group is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. is there. However, when the total of each m is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
  • the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the sum of each n is an integer of 0 to 60. is there. However, when the total of each n is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) — in the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) is an oxygen atom side.
  • a form in which the terminal of X is bonded to X is preferred.
  • the compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
  • the total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, in which ethylene oxide or propylene oxide is opened to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by an addition reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii).
  • pentaerythritol derivatives and / or dipentaerythritol derivatives are more preferable.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”).
  • exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
  • polymerizable compound examples include urethane acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765. Also suitable are urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton as described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418. Furthermore, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are described as polymerizable compounds.
  • polymerizable compounds include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 "(manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA- 306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha), trimethylolpropane triacrylate (commercially available products are A-TMPT; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc. It is done.
  • cyclic ether examples include those having an epoxy group such as bisphenol A type epoxy resin, JER-827, JER-828, JER-834, JER-1001, JER-1002, JER-1003.
  • JER-1055, JER-1007, JER-1009, JER-1010 manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.
  • EPICLON 860, EPICLON 1050, EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • bisphenol F As type epoxy resins, JER-806, JER-807, JER-4004, JER-4005, JER-4007, JER-4010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resins Co., Ltd.), EPICLON83 EPICLON 835 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (above, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), etc., and phenol novolac type epoxy resins such as JER-152, JER-154, JER -157S70, JER-157S65 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770,
  • the details of usage methods can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the colored photosensitive resin composition.
  • a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable.
  • those having three or more functional groups are preferable, and further, different functional groups / different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic ester, methacrylate ester, styrene). It is also effective to adjust both sensitivity and strength by using a compound of a vinyl compound or a vinyl ether compound).
  • the developability of the colored photosensitive resin composition can be adjusted, and an excellent pattern forming ability can be obtained.
  • the selection of the polymerizable compound is also possible with respect to the compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, a photopolymerization initiator, a dispersion, an alkali-soluble resin, etc.) contained in the colored photosensitive resin composition.
  • the method of use is an important factor. For example, compatibility may be improved by using a low-purity compound or using two or more kinds in combination.
  • a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a support.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the composition of the present invention is preferably 3 to 25% by mass, more preferably 5 to 20% by mass, and more preferably 7 to 15% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the colored photosensitive resin composition. % Is particularly preferred.
  • composition of the present invention is a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, and (G) a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain, an organic solvent, a crosslinking agent, etc. May be included.
  • a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (hereinafter also referred to as “(G) resin”) may be contained. (G) By further containing a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain, the composition of the present invention can be cured more effectively.
  • the resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain is not particularly limited as long as it has a polymerizable double bond in the side chain, but the polymerizable monomer having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups (p) And a copolymer (a) with other polymerizable monomer (q), a resin obtained by reacting a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and a compound (b) having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond Is preferred.
  • the polymerizable monomer having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups constituting the resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (p) has 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • a monomer represented by the following general formula (1) can be used.
  • each of R 1 and R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • R 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 3 represents 1 to C carbon atoms
  • 4 represents an alkylene group or a single bond
  • n represents an integer of 2 or more and 6 or less.
  • Examples of the monomer represented by the general formula (1) include monoesters of polyhydric alcohols having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and glycerol mono (meth) acrylate is preferred.
  • the other polymerizable monomer (q) is a polymerizable monomer copolymerizable with the polymerizable monomer (p) having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups.
  • Esters N-vinylpyrrolidone; styrene and its derivatives, styrenes such as ⁇ -methylstyrene; acrylamides such as (meth) acrylamide, methylol (meth) acrylamide, alkoxymethylol (meth) acrylamide, and diacetone (meth) acrylamide; Examples include (meth) acrylonitrile, other vinyl compounds such as ethylene, propylene, butylene, vinyl chloride, and vinyl acetate, and macromonomers such as polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer and polystyrene macromonomer. These monomers can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups and the other polymerizable monomer (q) is preferably 5 to 95% by mass: 95 to 5% by mass, 70% by mass: More preferably, it is 70 to 30% by mass.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) is less than 5% by mass, the number of ethylenically unsaturated double bonds that can be introduced is small, and the double bond equivalent (double bond equivalent defined by the following formula) The numerical value becomes large and sufficient sensitivity cannot be obtained.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) exceeds 95% by mass, it becomes possible to introduce many ethylenically unsaturated double bonds, but the ratio of the polymerizable monomer (q) becomes low. It is difficult to maintain physical properties such as dispersion stability, solubility, and chemical resistance.
  • a copolymer (a) of a polymerizable monomer (p) having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups and another polymerizable monomer (q) can be produced by a known method. No. 156930, paragraph 0013 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain is obtained by reacting the copolymer (a) with a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and a compound (b) having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Is obtained.
  • the functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group of the compound (b) having a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include an isocyanate group and a carboxyl group. Groups are preferred.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an isocyanate group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include 2-acryloylethyl isocyanate and 2-methacryloylethyl isocyanate.
  • Specific examples of the compound having a carboxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, and maleic anhydride.
  • the amount of ethylenically unsaturated double bonds introduced into the copolymer (a) via a hydroxyl group is indicated by the “double bond equivalent” of the resulting resin.
  • the double bond equivalent of the (G) resin is preferably 200 to 2,000, and more preferably 300 to 900.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the (G) resin is preferably 2000 to 200000, more preferably 5000 to 50000 from the viewpoint of good dispersibility of the composition of the present invention.
  • the reaction between the copolymer (a) and the compound (b) having a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond can be carried out by a known method, for example, JP-A-2005-156930. Reference can be made to the description of paragraph 0016 of the publication, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (G) is as follows: The amount is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and still more preferably 30 to 80% by mass.
  • (G) 1 type of resin which has a polymerizable double bond in a side chain may be contained in the composition of this invention, and may be contained 2 or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • composition of the present invention may further contain an alkali-soluble resin as a binder.
  • component contained in the composition of this invention as an dispersing agent component is not contained in alkali-soluble resin here.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is a linear organic polymer, and promotes at least one alkali-solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having a group. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acryl / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable. From the viewpoint of development control, acrylic resins and acrylamide resins are preferable. Resins and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
  • Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the group is soluble in an organic solvent and developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution. Possible are preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable.
  • These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the monomer capable of imparting an acid group after the polymerization include a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a monomer having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-isocyanatoethyl (methacrylate). ) Monomers having an isocyanate group such as acrylate. These monomers for introducing an acid group may be only one type or two or more types.
  • a monomer having an acid group and / or a monomer capable of imparting an acid group after polymerization (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “monomer for introducing an acid group”) .) May be polymerized as a monomer component.
  • a treatment for imparting an acid group as described later is required after the polymerization.
  • a known radical polymerization method can be applied.
  • Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
  • a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable, such as a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, and a crotonic acid copolymer.
  • a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable as the alkali-soluble resin.
  • examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate,
  • vinyl compounds such as hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, glycidyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, tetrahydrofurfury
  • the alkali-soluble resin may include a polymer (a) obtained by polymerizing a monomer component which essentially includes a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “ether dimer”). preferable.
  • ED general formula
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the coloring composition of this invention can form the cured coating film which was very excellent also in transparency with heat resistance.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited.
  • Linear or branched alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; Alicyclic groups such as cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl; and the like.
  • an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is
  • ether dimer examples include dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, (N-propyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isopropyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (n-butyl) ) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobutyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl) -2, 2 '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-amyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis 2-propenoate, di (stearyl) -2,
  • dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2′- [Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred.
  • These ether dimers may be only one kind or two or more kinds.
  • the structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
  • an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group may be used.
  • an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group an alkali-soluble resin containing an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group or the like in the side chain is useful.
  • Examples of the above-described polymer containing a polymerizable group include a dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.
  • KS resist 106 all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • Cyclomer P series all manufactured by Plaxel
  • CF200 series all manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • Ebecryl 3800 manufactured by Daicel UCB Corporation
  • an alkali-soluble resin containing these polymerizable groups an isocyanate group and an OH group are reacted in advance to leave one unreacted isocyanate group and a compound containing a (meth) acryloyl group and an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group; Urethane-modified polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by the above reaction, unsaturated group-containing acrylic obtained by reaction of an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group and a compound having both an epoxy group and a polymerizable double bond in the molecule Resin, acid pendant type epoxy acrylate resin, OH group-containing acrylic resin and polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by reacting a polymerizable double bond, OH group-containing acrylic resin and isocyanate Resin obtained by reacting compound having polymerizable group, JP 2002-229207 A Resin obtained by basic treatment of a resin having an ester group having a leaving group such as a halogen atom or a sulf
  • alkali-soluble resin in particular, a benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer and a multi-component copolymer composed of benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers are suitable.
  • the description in paragraphs 0558 to 0571 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0685] to [0700] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to and the contents thereof can be referred to. Is incorporated herein.
  • the copolymer (B) described in paragraph Nos. 0029 to 0063 described in JP 2012-32767 A and the alkali-soluble resin used in Examples paragraph Nos. 0088 to 2020 of JP 2012-208474 A
  • the binder resin described in 0098 and the binder resin used in Examples the binder resin described in Paragraph Nos.
  • the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and most preferably 70 mgKOH / g to 120 mgKOH / g.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 2,000 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000, and most preferably 7,000 to 20,000.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin in the coloring composition is preferably 1% by mass to 15% by mass, more preferably based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is 2% by mass to 12% by mass, and particularly preferably 3% by mass to 10% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the colored photosensitive resin composition are satisfied, but in particular, the solubility and coating of ultraviolet absorbers, alkali-soluble resins and dispersants, etc. Is preferably selected in consideration of safety and safety.
  • organic solvents examples include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and oxyacetic acid.
  • esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and oxyacetic acid.
  • Alkyl eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)
  • 3-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters Examples: methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate etc.
  • 2-Oxypropio Acid alkyl esters eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc.
  • organic solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoints of solubility of the ultraviolet absorber and the alkali-soluble resin, improvement of the coated surface, and the like.
  • It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the composition is 5% by mass to 80% by mass from the viewpoint of applicability, and is further 5% by mass to 60% by mass. 10% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction.
  • at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group.
  • the blending amount of the crosslinking agent is not particularly defined, but is preferably 2 to 30% by mass, more preferably 3 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of cross-linking agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • -Polymerization inhibitor- In the composition of the present invention, it is desirable to add a small amount of a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the composition.
  • the polymerization inhibitor that can be used in the present invention include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6- tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
  • the addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably about 0.01% by mass to about 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the whole composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • Various surfactants may be added to the composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant
  • the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved. Sex can be improved more. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, the wettability to the coated surface is reduced by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid. Is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several ⁇ m is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
  • fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1) Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.).
  • phthalocyanine derivatives trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • organosiloxane polymer KP341 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
  • anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • silicone surfactant examples include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Toray Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition. 005 mass% to 1.0 mass%.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • additives for example, fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents, and the like can be blended with the composition of the present invention as necessary.
  • these additives include those described in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A No. 2004-295116.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
  • the following compounds are preferably used as the ultraviolet absorber.
  • Organic carboxylic acid, organic carboxylic anhydride-- may contain an organic carboxylic acid having a molecular weight of 1000 or less and / or an organic carboxylic acid anhydride.
  • Specific examples of the organic carboxylic acid compound include aliphatic carboxylic acids and aromatic carboxylic acids.
  • aliphatic carboxylic acids include monocarboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, Examples thereof include dicarboxylic acids such as glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, cyclohexenedicarboxylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid and fumaric acid, and tricarboxylic acids such as tricarbaryl acid and aconitic acid.
  • monocarboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid
  • aromatic carboxylic acid examples include carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group such as benzoic acid and phthalic acid, and carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond.
  • carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group such as benzoic acid and phthalic acid
  • carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid.
  • those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500 specifically maleic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, and itaconic acid are preferred.
  • organic carboxylic acid anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples include acetic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, and tetrahydrophthalic anhydride. Succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, glutaric anhydride, 1,2-cyclohexene dicarboxylic anhydride, n-octadecyl succinic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, etc. An aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydride is mentioned.
  • aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride examples include phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride. Of these, those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500, specifically maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, and itaconic anhydride are preferred.
  • the amount of these organic carboxylic acid and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydride is usually 0.01 to 10 mass in the total solid content. %, Preferably 0.03 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 3% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
  • the components constituting the composition may be combined at once, or may be sequentially combined after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent.
  • the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
  • composition prepared as described above is preferably subjected to use after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of about 0.01 ⁇ m to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably about 0.05 ⁇ m to 0.5 ⁇ m. be able to.
  • the composition of the present invention can form a cured film having excellent heat resistance and color characteristics, it is suitably used for forming a color pattern (colored layer) of a color filter.
  • the composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a colored pattern such as a color filter used in a solid-state imaging device (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.) or an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD). it can. Furthermore, it can be suitably used as a production application for printing ink, inkjet ink, paint, and the like.
  • a color filter for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD and a CMOS can be suitably used as a production application.
  • a colored photosensitive resin composition layer (hereinafter also referred to as “colored composition layer”) is formed by applying the colored photosensitive resin composition of the present invention on a support.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention can be suitably applied to the formation of a colored pattern (pixel) included in a color filter.
  • the support for forming a pattern by the pattern forming method of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a support applicable to pattern formation in addition to a plate-like material such as a substrate.
  • the method for producing a color filter of the present invention applies the pattern forming method of the present invention, and includes a step of forming a colored pattern on a support using the pattern forming method of the present invention. That is, the method for producing a color filter of the present invention applies the pattern forming method of the present invention.
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition layer of the present invention is applied on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer. And a step of exposing the colored photosensitive resin composition layer in a pattern, and a step of developing and removing an unexposed portion to form a colored pattern. Further, if necessary, a step of baking the colored photosensitive resin composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of baking the developed colored pattern (post-baking step) may be provided.
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition layer is formed on the support by applying the composition of the present invention.
  • a solid-state imaging device in which an imaging element (light-receiving element) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) is provided on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate).
  • An element substrate can be used.
  • the colored pattern in the present invention may be formed on the imaging element forming surface side (front surface) of the solid-state imaging element substrate, or may be formed on the imaging element non-forming surface side (back surface).
  • a light shielding film may be provided between the colored patterns in the solid-state image sensor or on the back surface of the substrate for the solid-state image sensor.
  • an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • composition of the present invention on the support, various coating methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, screen printing method and the like can be applied.
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition layer coated on the support can be dried (prebaked) at a temperature of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C. for 10 seconds to 300 seconds using a hot plate, oven or the like.
  • Step of exposing colored photosensitive resin composition layer to pattern (when pattern is formed by photolithography method) >> -Exposure process-
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition layer formed in the colored photosensitive resin composition layer forming step is subjected to pattern exposure through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure device such as a stepper, for example. Thereby, a cured film is obtained.
  • an exposure device such as a stepper, for example.
  • a cured film is obtained.
  • radiation (light) that can be used for exposure ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are particularly preferable (particularly preferably i-line).
  • Irradiation dose is more preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1500mJ / cm 2 is preferably 50mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1000mJ / cm 2, and most preferably 80mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 500mJ / cm 2.
  • the thickness of the cured film is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 0.9 ⁇ m, and further preferably 0.2 ⁇ m to 0.8 ⁇ m. It is preferable to set the film thickness to 1.0 ⁇ m or less because high resolution and high adhesion can be obtained.
  • a cured film having a thin film thickness of 0.7 ⁇ m or less can also be suitably formed, and the obtained cured film is developed in a pattern forming process described later, thereby forming a thin film.
  • the coloring pattern excellent in developability, surface roughness suppression, and pattern shape can be obtained.
  • the colored photosensitive resin composition layer in the light unirradiated portion in the exposure step is eluted in the alkaline aqueous solution, and only the photocured portion remains.
  • the developer is preferably an organic alkali developer that does not cause damage to the underlying image sensor or circuit.
  • the development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is conventionally 20 seconds to 90 seconds. In order to remove the residue more, in recent years, it may be carried out for 120 seconds to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to further improve residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and further supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
  • alkaline agent used in the developer examples include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide.
  • Organic alkaline compounds such as choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0] -7-undecene, and the concentration of these alkaline agents is 0.001 to 10% by mass
  • An alkaline aqueous solution diluted with pure water so as to be preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass is preferably used as the developer.
  • an inorganic alkali may be used for the developer, and as the inorganic alkali, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metaoxalate and the like are preferable.
  • a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
  • post-bake heat treatment after drying. If a multicolor coloring pattern is formed, the said process can be repeated sequentially for every color, and a cured film can be manufactured. Thereby, a color filter is obtained.
  • the post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete curing, and a heat curing treatment is usually performed at 100 ° C. to 240 ° C., preferably 200 ° C. to 240 ° C.
  • This post-bake treatment is performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, or the like so that the coating film after development is in the above-described condition. be able to.
  • Step of Forming Photoresist Layer, Step of Obtaining Resist Pattern, and Step of Dry Etching can be performed using an etching gas with the patterned photoresist layer as a mask.
  • a positive or negative radiation sensitive composition is applied on a colored layer obtained by curing a colored photosensitive resin composition layer, and dried to form a photoresist layer.
  • a mode in which heat treatment after exposure (PEB) and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable.
  • a positive type radiation sensitive composition As the photoresist, for example, a positive type radiation sensitive composition is used.
  • positive type radiation sensitive composition positive type photo sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays.
  • a positive resist composition suitable for resist can be used.
  • the radiation g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
  • a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
  • a positive radiation-sensitive composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin indicates that a quinonediazide group is decomposed by irradiation with light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less to produce a carboxyl group, resulting in alkali-solubility from an alkali-insoluble state. It is what you use. Since this positive photoresist has remarkably excellent resolution, it is used for manufacturing integrated circuits such as ICs and LSIs.
  • the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound.
  • Examples of commercially available products include FHi622BC (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials).
  • the thickness of the photoresist layer is preferably from 0.1 to 3 ⁇ m, preferably from 0.2 to 2.5 ⁇ m, and more preferably from 0.3 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the formation of the photoresist layer by coating can be suitably performed using the coating method for the colored layer described above.
  • a resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer) provided with a group of resist through holes is formed.
  • the formation of the resist pattern is not particularly limited, and can be performed by appropriately optimizing a conventionally known photolithography technique.
  • a resist through hole group in the photoresist layer By providing a resist through hole group in the photoresist layer by exposure and development, a resist pattern as an etching mask used in the next etching is provided on the colored layer.
  • the exposure of the photoresist layer is performed by exposing the positive-type or negative-type radiation-sensitive composition with g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern. Can do. After the exposure, the photoresist is removed in accordance with a region where a colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
  • any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist without affecting the colored layer containing the colorant.
  • Combinations of solvents and alkaline aqueous solutions can be used.
  • an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable.
  • alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, Examples include pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene.
  • alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developing solution, generally a washing process is performed with water after development.
  • the resist pattern as an etching mask, patterning is performed by dry etching so that a through hole group is formed in the colored layer. Thereby, a colored pattern is formed.
  • the through hole group is provided in a checkered pattern in the colored layer. Therefore, the first colored pattern in which the through hole group is provided in the colored layer has a plurality of square-shaped first colored pixels in a checkered pattern.
  • Dry etching is preferably performed in the following manner from the viewpoint of forming a pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
  • a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ) a first stage etching is performed to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and a nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed.
  • N 2 nitrogen gas
  • O 2 oxygen gas
  • a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed
  • over-etching is performed after the support is exposed.
  • the form containing these is preferable.
  • Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
  • (1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
  • (2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
  • (3) The first-stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2).
  • the second stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2).
  • the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
  • Overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4), and overetching is performed.
  • the mixed gas used in the first stage etching step preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape.
  • the first stage etching process can avoid damage to the support body by etching to a region where the support body is not exposed.
  • the second etching step and the over-etching step may be performed by etching the region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas in the first etching process, and then damaging the support. From the viewpoint of avoidance, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
  • the ratio between the etching amount in the first stage etching process and the etching amount in the second stage etching process is preferably in the range of more than 0% and not more than 50%. 10 to 20% is more preferable.
  • the etching amount is an amount calculated from the difference between the remaining film thickness to be etched and the film thickness before etching.
  • the etching preferably includes an over-etching process.
  • the overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first.
  • the over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable, and 10 to 15% is particularly preferable.
  • the resist pattern that is, etching mask
  • the removal of the resist pattern preferably includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent on the resist pattern so that the resist pattern can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern using cleaning water.
  • Examples of the step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on the resist pattern so that the resist pattern can be removed include, for example, a step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on at least the resist pattern and stagnating for a predetermined time to perform paddle development Can be mentioned.
  • time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes.
  • examples of the step of removing the resist pattern using the cleaning water include a step of removing the resist pattern by spraying the cleaning water onto the resist pattern from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle.
  • the washing water pure water can be preferably used.
  • examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support. When the spray nozzle is movable, the resist pattern is more effectively removed by moving the support pattern from the center of the support to the end of the support more than twice during the process of removing the resist pattern and spraying the cleaning water. be able to.
  • the stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent.
  • organic solvents include 1) hydrocarbon compounds, 2) halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, 3) alcohol compounds, 4) ether or acetal compounds, 5) ketones or aldehyde compounds, and 6) ester compounds.
  • the stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
  • the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group.
  • Specific examples include monoisopropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, triisopropanolamine, N-ethylethanolamine, N, N-dibutylethanolamine, N-butylethanolamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine.
  • they are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and more preferably monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH).
  • cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ⁇ -caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, 2- Preferred examples include pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, and 2,6-lutidine.
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • the stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
  • acyclic nitrogen-containing compound at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and cyclic
  • the nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
  • a deposit means an etching product deposited and deposited on the side wall of a colored layer.
  • the content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by weight or more and 11 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution. On the other hand, what is 65 to 70 mass parts is desirable. Further, the stripping solution is preferably obtained by diluting a mixture of an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
  • the manufacturing method of this invention may have a well-known process as a manufacturing method of the color filter for solid-state image sensors as a process other than the above as needed.
  • a curing step of curing the formed colored pattern by heating and / or exposure may be included as necessary. Good.
  • the composition according to the present invention when used, for example, clogging of a nozzle or a piping part of a coating apparatus discharge part, contamination due to adhesion, sedimentation, or drying of a colored composition or pigment in the coating machine may occur. . Therefore, in order to efficiently clean the contamination caused by the composition of the present invention, it is preferable to use the solvent related to the present composition as the cleaning liquid.
  • the solvent related to the present composition as the cleaning liquid.
  • JP-A-7-128867, JP-A-7-146562, JP-A-8-278737, JP-A-2000-273370, JP-A-2006-85140, JP-A-2006-291191 The cleaning liquids described in JP2007-2101A, JP2007-2102A, JP2007-281523A, etc.
  • alkylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylates and alkylene glycol monoalkyl ethers are preferred.
  • These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When mixing 2 or more types, it is preferable to mix the solvent which has a hydroxyl group, and the solvent which does not have a hydroxyl group.
  • the mass ratio of the solvent having a hydroxyl group and the solvent having no hydroxyl group is from 1/99 to 99/1, preferably from 10/90 to 90/10, more preferably from 20/80 to 80/20.
  • the ratio is particularly preferably 60/40.
  • a surfactant related to the present composition described above may be added to the cleaning liquid.
  • the color filter of the present invention uses the composition of the present invention, the exposure can be performed with excellent exposure margin, and the formed colored pattern (colored pixel) is excellent in pattern shape, and the pattern surface is rough and developed. Since the residue in the portion is suppressed, the color characteristics are excellent.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels.
  • the color filter for a solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used as a color filter disposed between, for example, a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
  • the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 ⁇ m or less.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a configuration provided with the color filter in the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. .
  • a transfer electrode comprising a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support.
  • a solid-state imaging device CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.
  • light collecting means for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used not only for the solid-state imaging device but also for an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, and is particularly suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device.
  • the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image with a good display image color and excellent display characteristics.
  • display devices For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year).
  • the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT liquid crystal display device.
  • the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
  • the present invention is applied to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS and a pixel division method such as MVA, STN, TN, VA, OCS, FFS, and R-OCB. it can.
  • the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
  • COA Color-filter On Array
  • the required characteristics for the color filter layer require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the stripping solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above.
  • the color filter of the present invention since a dye multimer excellent in hue is used, the color purity, light transmittance, etc. are good and the color pattern (pixel) is excellent in hue, so the resolution is high and the long-term durability is excellent.
  • a COA type liquid crystal display device can be provided.
  • a resin film may be provided on the color filter layer.
  • the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members.
  • these components for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
  • backlights SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
  • the color filter according to the present invention When the color filter according to the present invention is used in a liquid crystal display device, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue LED light sources (RGB-LED).
  • RGB-LED red, green and blue LED light sources
  • Pigment Dispersion Composition 1 Zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment (CI Pigment Green 58) 9.59 parts by weight Yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 185) 4.11 parts by weight The following dye derivative (I-1) 1.37 parts by weight Dispersant (C-1) 4.93 parts by mass Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 80.0 parts by mass
  • a colored photosensitive resin composition was prepared by uniformly stirring and mixing a mixture having the following composition.
  • Pigment dispersion composition 1 65.7 parts by mass
  • Resin binder 1 1.24 parts by mass (as 40% by mass resin solution)
  • Photopolymerization initiator 1.2-octanedione, 1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (O-benzoyloxime)] (manufactured by BASF, IRGACURE OXE01)
  • Ethylenically unsaturated compound Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate modified with ethylene oxide (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E))
  • 2.34 parts by mass Fluorosurfactant (Dainippon Ink Co., Ltd., MegaFuck F- 781F) 0.02 parts by mass p-methoxyphenol 0.0003 parts by mass Propylene glycol
  • Colored photosensitive resin compositions 2 to 15 were prepared in the same manner as the colored photosensitive resin composition 1 except that the composition content was changed to the composition shown in Table 1 below.
  • the derivative A, derivative (I-2), derivative (II-1), and derivative (II-2) used in the colored photosensitive resin compositions 2 to 12 are represented by the following structural formula.
  • Pattern linearity >> The pattern substrate obtained above was observed from above using a length measuring SEM (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi).
  • Viscosity change before and after aging is 3.0% or less.
  • 4 The viscosity change before and after aging is more than 3.0% and 5.0% or less.
  • 3 The viscosity change before and after aging is more than 5.0% and 10.0% or less.
  • 2 The viscosity change before and after aging is more than 10.0% and 30.0% or less.
  • 1 Viscosity change before and after aging exceeds 30.0%.
  • Luminance unevenness The colored photosensitive resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples obtained above were applied on a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.8 ⁇ m, and prebaked at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds. Thus, a colored coating film was obtained.
  • Each colored coating obtained was placed between the observation lens and the light source of the optical microscope, irradiated with light toward the observation lens, and transmitted through an optical microscope in which a digital camera with a magnification of 1000 was installed. The light state was observed.
  • the digital camera installed in the optical microscope is equipped with a CCD with 1.28 million pixels, and the surface of the colored coating film in the transmitted light state was photographed with the digital camera.
  • the photographed image was stored as digitally converted data (digital image) in an 8-bit bitmap format.
  • photography of the coating film surface of a colored coating film was performed with respect to 20 area
  • the digitally converted data was digitized and stored as a density distribution of 256 gradations in which the luminance of each of the three primary colors RGB was 0 to 255.
  • the stored digital image was divided into a grid shape so that one grid size corresponds to 0.5 ⁇ m square on the actual substrate, and the luminance in one section was averaged.
  • the total number of sections in one area was 636416.
  • an arbitrary luminance and the average luminance of all adjacent sections adjacent to it were measured.
  • a section having a difference from the average brightness of the adjacent section of 5% or more was recognized as a significant difference section, and the average total number of significant difference sections in all regions was calculated. The smaller the numerical value, the smaller the density difference between adjacent sections, the less the luminance unevenness, and the better the characteristics as a color filter.
  • ⁇ Criteria ⁇ 5 The number of significant difference sections is 2000 or less. 4: The number of significant difference compartments is 2001 to 3000. 3: The number of significant difference compartments is 3001 to 5000. 2: The number of significant difference compartments is 5001 to 10,000. 1: The number of significant difference sections is 10001 or more.
  • each symbol means the following compound.
  • PG58 zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment (CI Pigment Green 58)
  • PY139 Isoindoline yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 139)
  • PY150 Nickel azo yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 150)
  • PY185 Isoindoline yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 185)
  • PG36 Copper halide phthalocyanine pigment (CI Pigment Green 36)
  • Unsubstituted Zn phthalocyanine pigment non-halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment
  • the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention shown in Examples includes (A) a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment and (B) a dye derivative having a specific structure, which are essential components for the composition of the present invention. It can be seen that lithography, pattern linearity, stability, and luminance unevenness are greatly improved.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

This photosensitive coloring resin composition contains (A) a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment, (B-1) a dye derivative represented by general formula (I) and/or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by general formula (II), (C) a dispersant, (D) a photopolymerization initiator and (E) a polymerizable compound. The dispersant (C) is contained in an amount of 20-40 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the pigment.

Description

着色感光性樹脂組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、および画像表示装置Colored photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
 本発明は、液晶表示素子(LCD)や固体撮像素子(CCD、CMOSなど)等に用いられるカラーフィルタを作製するのに好適な着色感光性樹脂組成物、前記組成物により作製された着色領域を有するカラーフィルタ、および、前記カラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子、有機LED用液晶表示装置などの画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a colored photosensitive resin composition suitable for producing a color filter used for a liquid crystal display element (LCD), a solid-state imaging element (CCD, CMOS, etc.), and a colored region produced by the composition. The present invention relates to a color filter having a color filter, a solid-state imaging device having the color filter, and an image display device such as an organic LED liquid crystal display device.
 近年、パーソナルコンピュータ、特に大画面液晶テレビの発達に伴い、液晶ディスプレイ(LCD)、とりわけカラー液晶ディスプレイの需要が増加する傾向にある。更なる高画質化の要求から有機ELディスプレイの普及も待ち望まれている。一方、デジタルカメラ、カメラ付き携帯電話の普及から、CCDイメージセンサーなどの固体撮像素子も需要が大きく伸びている。
 これらのディスプレイや光学素子のキーデバイスとしてカラーフィルタが使用されており、更なる高画質化の要求とともにコストダウンへの要求が高まっている。このようなカラーフィルタは、通常、赤(R)、緑(G)、および青(B)の3原色の着色パターンを備えており、表示デバイスや撮像素子において、通過する光を3原色へ分画する役割を果たしている。
In recent years, with the development of personal computers, particularly large-screen liquid crystal televisions, the demand for liquid crystal displays (LCD), especially color liquid crystal displays, has been increasing. The spread of organic EL displays is also awaited due to the demand for higher image quality. On the other hand, with the widespread use of digital cameras and camera-equipped mobile phones, the demand for solid-state imaging devices such as CCD image sensors has greatly increased.
Color filters are used as key devices for these displays and optical elements, and the demand for cost reduction is increasing along with the demand for higher image quality. Such a color filter is usually provided with a coloring pattern of three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and in a display device or an image sensor, light passing therethrough is divided into three primary colors. It plays a role to draw.
 カラーフィルタに使用されている着色剤としては、顔料を用いることが一般的であり、例えば、特許文献1~3に記載の着色組成物が開示されている。 As the colorant used in the color filter, a pigment is generally used. For example, the coloring compositions described in Patent Documents 1 to 3 are disclosed.
特開2007-156395号公報JP 2007-156395 A 特開2008-310000号公報JP 2008-310000 A 特開2009-251481号公報(特許第5117913号)JP 2009-251481 A (Patent No. 5117913)
 ところで、カラーフィルタを薄膜化することでクロストーク(光の混色)が軽減されるが、分光の形は維持したまま薄膜化が求められるため、固形分中の顔料濃度を大幅に上げることが求められる。このため、特許文献1~3に記載の組成物では、相対的にリソグラフィーに必要な成分の含有量が少なくなり、パターン形成が困難となる傾向にある。
 このように、リソグラフィーに必要な成分の含有量を確保するために、少量の分散剤で良好な顔料分散物を得ることが重要な課題となっている。
By the way, the crosstalk (mixture of light) is reduced by making the color filter thinner, but it is required to make the film thinner while maintaining the spectral shape, so it is required to greatly increase the pigment concentration in the solid content. It is done. For this reason, in the compositions described in Patent Documents 1 to 3, the content of components necessary for lithography is relatively small, and pattern formation tends to be difficult.
Thus, in order to ensure the content of the components necessary for lithography, it is an important issue to obtain a good pigment dispersion with a small amount of dispersant.
 本発明は、かかる課題を解決するものであって、少量の分散剤で良好な分散物を得ることが可能であり、良好なリソグラフィー(解像性)、パターン直線性、パターンの同色画素間の安定性および輝度ムラに優れる着色感光性樹脂組成物、前記着色感光性樹脂組成物を利用した、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention solves such a problem, and it is possible to obtain a good dispersion with a small amount of a dispersing agent, and good lithography (resolution), pattern linearity, and the same color pixels between patterns. The present invention relates to a colored photosensitive resin composition excellent in stability and luminance unevenness, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored photosensitive resin composition.
 本発明者らは詳細に検討した結果、所定の顔料および所定の色素誘導体を用いることにより、上記課題を解決しうることを見出した。
 具体的には、下記手段<1>により、好ましくは、<2>~<15>により、上記課題は解決された。
<1>(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、(B-1)下記一般式(I)で表される色素誘導体および/または(B-2)下記一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体、(C)分散剤、(D)光重合開始剤、ならびに(E)重合性化合物を含有し、(C)分散剤の含有量が、顔料100質量部に対し、20~40質量部である着色感光性樹脂組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(I)中、Dyeはn価の有機色素残基を表し、Xは単結合、-CONH-Y-、-SONH-Y-または-CHNHCOCHNH-Y-(Yは置換基を有していても良いアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。)を表し、Yは-NH-または-O-を表し、Zは、nが1を表す場合は水酸基、アルコキシ基、下記一般式(III)で表される基、または-NH-X-Dye(Xは一般式(I)中のXと同義である)を表し、nが2~4の整数を表す場合はそれぞれ水酸基、アルコキシ基、または下記一般式(III)で表される基を表し、RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。mは1~6の整数を表し、nは1~4の整数を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数のX、Y、R、およびRは、それぞれ、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(III)中、Yは-NH-または-O-を表す。RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。mは1~6の整数を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 一般式(II)中、Dyeは置換基を有していてもよいキノフタロン残基を表し、Xは、-NR’SO-、-SONR’-、-CONR’-、-CHNR’COCHNR’-、または-NR’CO-を表し、Xは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が4~20の複素芳香環基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-または-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。Xは、-NR’-または-O-を表す。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。AおよびBは、それぞれ、下記一般式(1)で表される基、下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH-R、-OR、-NR1011、-Cl、-Fおよび-X-X-X-Dyeから選ばれる基を表し、Rは置換されていてもよい含窒素複素環残基を表し、R、R10、R11は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20アルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、nは0~20の整数を表す。AおよびBのいずれか一方は、下記一般式(1)で表される基、下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH)n-R、-ORまたは-NR1011であり、tは1~3の整数を表す。tが2以上の場合、複数のX、X、X、A、およびBは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 一般式(1)中、Yは-NR’-または-O-を表し、Yは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-、-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。RとRが一体となって複素環構造を形成してもよく、当該複素環構造は、更なる窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも、置換基を有していてもよい。
一般式(2)中、Zはトリアジン環と窒素原子を結ぶ単結合、-NR’-、-NR’-G-CO-、-NR’-G-CONR’’-、-NR’-G-SO-、-NR’-G-SONR’’-、-O-G-CO-、-O-G-CONR’-、-O-G-SO-または-O-G-SONR’-を表し、Gは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、R、R、およびRはそれぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、Rは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。
<2>さらに、黄色顔料を含む、<1>に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<3>黄色顔料が、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150および/またはC.I.ピグメントイエロー185である、<2>に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<4>(C)分散剤が、片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基とトリカルボン酸無水物またはテトラカルボン酸二無水物とを反応してなる、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<5>一般式(I)中、Dyeがベンズイミダゾロン骨格を有するモノアゾ色素構造を有する、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<6>一般式(II)中、キノフタロン残基が、下記一般式(II-1)で表される、<1>~<5>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
 一般式(II-1)中、DおよびEはそれぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、DおよびEが結合するベンゼン環とともに形成される、置換基を有してもよい芳香環基または複素環基、ヒドロキシル基、炭素数1~3のアルコキシル基、カルボキシル基あるいはその塩、炭素数1~20のエステル、炭素数1~20のアミド、スルホン基あるいはその塩、スルファモイル基、-NR’R’’-、ニトロ基から選ばれるいずれかの基を表す。式中、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。pは0~4の整数を表し、qは4-pで算出される整数を表す。*は、一般式(II)におけるXとの結合部位を表す。
<7>一般式(II)中、AおよびBは、一般式(1)で表される基または一般式(2)で表される基を表し、かつ、同一の基である、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<8>(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料が、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58である、<1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<9>組成物中の全固形分に対する、着色剤の合計量が、40質量%以上である、<1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<10>カラーフィルタの着色領域形成に用いられる<1>~<9>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
<11><1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜。
<12><1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物を支持体上に適用して着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程と、着色感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<13><1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物を支持体上に適用して着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程、
着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、
露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、およびレジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
<14><11>に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ、または<12>または<13>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法によって製造したカラーフィルタ。
<15><14>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子または画像表示装置。
As a result of detailed studies, the present inventors have found that the above-described problems can be solved by using a predetermined pigment and a predetermined dye derivative.
Specifically, the above-mentioned problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <15>.
<1> (A) a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment, (B-1) a dye derivative represented by the following general formula (I) and / or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by the following general formula (II), Coloring containing (C) a dispersant, (D) a photopolymerization initiator, and (E) a polymerizable compound, wherein the content of (C) the dispersant is 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Photosensitive resin composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In general formula (I), Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue, and X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 —, or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —. (Y 2 represents an optionally substituted alkylene group or arylene group), Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—, Z represents a hydroxyl group when n represents 1, Represents an alkoxy group, a group represented by the following general formula (III), or —NH—X-Dye (where X is the same as X in the general formula (I)), and n represents an integer of 2 to 4 hydroxyl case each represent an alkoxy group or a group of the following formula (III),, R 1 or R 2 are each represents an alkyl group optionally having a substituent, R 1 and R 2 May combine with each other to form a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom. m represents an integer of 1 to 6, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4. When n is 2 or more, the plurality of X, Y 1 , R 1 , and R 2 may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
In general formula (III), Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom. m represents an integer of 1 to 6.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
In the general formula (II), Dye represents an optionally substituted quinophthalone residue, and X 1 represents —NR′SO 2 —, —SO 2 NR′—, —CONR′—, —CH 2 NR′COCH 2 NR′— or —NR′CO—, wherein X 2 may have a substituent, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent Represents a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and these groups are bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO—. May be. X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. A and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n —R 8 , —OR 9 , —NR 10 R 11 represents a group selected from —Cl, —F and —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, R 9 , R 10 R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent. An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, and n represents an integer of 0 to 20. One of A and B is a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n—R 8 , —OR 9 or — NR 10 R 11 and t represents an integer of 1 to 3. When t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , A, and B may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
In general formula (1), Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—, and Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may contain a further nitrogen atom, oxygen atom or sulfur atom, or may have a substituent.
In the general formula (2), Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ″ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ″ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent. Represents an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, R ′ and R ″ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group. An alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent. Represents an alkenyl group having 20 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 7 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Alternatively, it represents an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
<2> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to <1>, further comprising a yellow pigment.
<3> The yellow pigment is C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 and / or C.I. I. The colored photosensitive resin composition according to <2>, which is CI Pigment Yellow 185.
<4> (C) The dispersant is obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic acid anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride, according to <1> to <3> The colored photosensitive resin composition in any one.
<5> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein Dye in the general formula (I) has a monoazo dye structure having a benzimidazolone skeleton.
<6> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the quinophthalone residue in general formula (II) is represented by the following general formula (II-1).
In general formula (II-1), D and E each have a substituent formed with a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a benzene ring to which D and E are bonded. Good aromatic or heterocyclic group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, carboxyl group or salt thereof, ester having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, amide having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, sulfone group or salt thereof, sulfamoyl Represents any group selected from a group, —NR′R ″ —, and a nitro group. In the formula, each of R ′ and R ″ is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group or a substituent. p represents an integer of 0 to 4, and q represents an integer calculated by 4-p. * Represents a binding site with X 1 in the general formula (II).
<7> In the general formula (II), A and B represent a group represented by the general formula (1) or a group represented by the general formula (2), and are the same group, <1> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of to <6>.
<8> (A) The zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment is C.I. I. The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, which is CI Pigment Green 58.
<9> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the total amount of the colorant relative to the total solid content in the composition is 40% by mass or more.
<10> The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, which is used for forming a colored region of a color filter.
<11> A cured film obtained by curing the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <10>.
<12> A step of applying the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <10> on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer, and a colored photosensitive resin composition layer A method for producing a color filter, which comprises a step of exposing the substrate to a pattern and a step of developing and removing unexposed portions to form a colored pattern.
<13> A step of applying the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <10> on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer and curing to form a colored layer ,
Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
A method for producing a color filter, comprising: a step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern; and a step of dry etching a colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
<14> A color filter having the cured film according to <11> or a color filter manufactured by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to <12> or <13>.
<15> A solid-state imaging device or an image display device having the color filter according to <14>.
 本発明によれば、分散剤の含有量が少なくても良好な分散物が得られるので、良好なリソグラフィー(解像性)、パターン直線性、パターンの同色画素間の安定性および輝度ムラに優れる着色感光性樹脂組成物、前記着色感光性樹脂組成物を利用した、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置の提供が可能となった。 According to the present invention, since a good dispersion can be obtained even if the content of the dispersant is small, excellent lithography (resolution), pattern linearity, stability between pixels of the same color in the pattern, and luminance unevenness are excellent. It has become possible to provide a colored photosensitive resin composition, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored photosensitive resin composition.
パターン直線性の評価における判定基準を模式的に表した図である。It is the figure which represented typically the criterion in evaluation of pattern linearity.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。尚、本願明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。また、本発明における有機EL素子とは、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子のことをいう。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、着色感光性樹脂組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail. In the present specification, “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value. The organic EL element in the present invention refers to an organic electroluminescence element.
In the present specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored photosensitive resin composition.
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記に於いて、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 また、本明細書中における「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等を意味する。また、本発明において光とは、活性光線または放射線を意味する。本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、X線、EUV光などによる露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も露光に含める。
In the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In addition, “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. In the present invention, light means actinic rays or radiation. Unless otherwise specified, “exposure” in this specification is not only exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Are also included in the exposure.
 また、本明細書において、“(メタ)アクリレート”はアクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、“(メタ)アクリル”はアクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、“(メタ)アクリロイル”はアクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 また、本明細書において、“単量体”と“モノマー”とは同義である。本明細書における単量体は、オリゴマーおよびポリマーと区別され、重量平均分子量が2,000以下の化合物をいう。本明細書において、重合性化合物とは、重合性官能基を有する化合物のことをいい、単量体であっても、ポリマーであってもよい。重合性官能基とは、重合反応に関与する基を言う。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてTSKgel Super AWM―H(東ソー(株)製、6.0mmID×15.0cmを、溶離液として10mmol/L リチウムブロミドNMP(N-メチルピロリジノン)溶液を用いることによって求めることができる。
In this specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and “(meth) acrylic” ) "Acryloyl" represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In the present specification, “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous. The monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less. In the present specification, the polymerizable compound means a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer. The polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
In this specification, a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by GPC measurement. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and TSKgel Super AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6) as a column. 0.0 mm ID × 15.0 cm can be determined by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as the eluent.
 本明細書において、化学式中のMeはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を、Prはプロピル基を、Buはブチル基を、Phはフェニル基をそれぞれ示す。 In this specification, Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Pr represents a propyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本発明は、上記の状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、色特性に優れた着色感光性樹脂組成物を提供することを目的とする。
In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
This invention is made | formed in view of said situation, and it aims at providing the colored photosensitive resin composition excellent in the color characteristic.
<着色感光性樹脂組成物>
 本発明の着色感光性樹脂組成物(以下、「本発明の組成物」、「着色組成物」ということがある)
は、(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、(B-1)一般式(I)で表される色素誘導体および/または(B-2)一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体(以下、まとめて、「(B)色素誘導体」ということがある)、(C)分散剤、(D)光重合開始剤、ならびに(E)重合性化合物を含有し、(C)分散剤の含有量が、顔料の合計量100質量部に対し、20~40質量部であることを特徴とする。
<Colored photosensitive resin composition>
Colored photosensitive resin composition of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “composition of the present invention” or “colored composition”)
(A) a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment, (B-1) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (I) and / or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (II) (hereinafter summarized) And (C) a dispersant, (D) a photopolymerization initiator, and (E) a polymerizable compound, and the content of (C) the dispersant is: 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of pigment.
 本発明の組成物を用いることにより、分散剤の含有量を顔料100質量部に対し、20~40質量部と少なくしても良好な分散物が得られるので、良好なリソグラフィー(解像性)、パターン直線性、パターンの同色画素間の安定性および輝度ムラに優れるようになる。このような本発明の効果が得られる理由は定かではないが、顔料として用いられるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニンが有する分子構造の平面性が、非ハロゲン化フタロシアニンや銅フタロシアニンなどよりも高いことに依存していると考えられる。すなわち、顔料は、分散剤が相互作用により分散される際、分子の平面性が高いほうが吸着されやすいため、少量の分散剤でも分散が可能になったと考えられる。
 また、本発明で用いる(B)色素誘導体は、トリアジン構造を有しており、トリアジン構造は平面性が高い化合物と強く吸着することから、平面性が高いハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニンが色素誘導体にもより強く吸着される。これらの結果、分散剤の含有量が少なくとても良好な分散物が得られると推定される。
 以下、本発明の組成物について詳細に説明する。
By using the composition of the present invention, a good dispersion can be obtained even if the content of the dispersant is reduced to 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. In addition, pattern linearity, stability between pixels of the same color in the pattern, and luminance unevenness are improved. The reason why the effects of the present invention can be obtained is not clear, but depends on the fact that the planarity of the molecular structure of the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine used as the pigment is higher than that of non-halogenated phthalocyanine, copper phthalocyanine, etc. It is thought that there is. That is, it is considered that the pigment can be dispersed even with a small amount of the dispersant because the higher the planarity of the molecule is more easily adsorbed when the dispersant is dispersed by the interaction.
In addition, the (B) dye derivative used in the present invention has a triazine structure, and the triazine structure strongly adsorbs to a compound having high planarity. Therefore, the zinc halide phthalocyanine having high planarity depends on the dye derivative. It is strongly adsorbed. As a result, it is presumed that a very good dispersion with a low content of dispersant can be obtained.
Hereinafter, the composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
<<(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料>>
 本発明は、(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を含む。本発明におけるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料は、フタロシアニン骨格に置換している置換基がハロゲン原子のみであり、フタロシアニン分子(構造)1個当たり、ハロゲン原子が合計で、少なくとも2個最大で16個結合した構造の顔料である。
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子および臭素原子の少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、塩素原子および/または臭素原子がより好ましく、塩素原子と臭素原子の両方を含むことがさらに好ましい。
<< (A) Zinc Halide Phthalocyanine Pigment >>
The present invention includes (A) a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment. In the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment in the present invention, the substituents substituted on the phthalocyanine skeleton are only halogen atoms, and a total of at least two halogen atoms are bonded per phthalocyanine molecule (structure) in a maximum of 16 pieces. It is a structural pigment.
The halogen atom preferably contains at least one of a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, more preferably a chlorine atom and / or a bromine atom, and further preferably contains both a chlorine atom and a bromine atom.
 ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料としては、例えば、下記一般式(F)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(F)中、X~X16は、それぞれ、塩素原子、臭素原子または水素原子を表し、X~X16の少なくとも2つは塩素原子、又は臭素原子である。
As a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment, the compound represented by the following general formula (F) is mentioned, for example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
In general formula (F), X 1 to X 16 each represent a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or a hydrogen atom, and at least two of X 1 to X 16 are a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
 分子中に結合したハロゲン原子の数が増すと、ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料の色相は青色から緑色となる。ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料が緑色となるためには、分子に結合したハロゲン原子として、臭素原子を8個以上有することが好ましく、中でも臭素原子を12個以上有することが、一層黄味を帯びた明度の高い緑色を発色する点でより好ましい。塩素原子に比べて臭素原子がより多く含有されていることが、より黄味の緑色を得る上では好ましい。
 中でも、X~X16のうち、の8個以上が臭素原子で置換されたものが、明度の高い緑色を呈することから、カラーフィルタの緑色画素(着色パターン)への使用に好適であり、臭素原子の置換数としては、10~14個であることがより好ましい。また、X~X16のうち、水素原子を取るものは2つ以下が好ましい。
As the number of halogen atoms bonded in the molecule increases, the hue of the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment changes from blue to green. In order for the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment to become green, it is preferable that the halogen atom bonded to the molecule has 8 or more bromine atoms, and among them, having 12 or more bromine atoms is more yellowish. It is more preferable in terms of developing a high green color. It is preferable that more bromine atoms are contained than chlorine atoms in order to obtain a more yellowish green color.
Among these, those in which 8 or more of X 1 to X 16 are substituted with bromine atoms exhibit a green color with high brightness, and are suitable for use in green pixels (colored patterns) of color filters. The number of bromine atoms substituted is more preferably 10 to 14. Further, among X 1 to X 16 , two or less of those taking a hydrogen atom are preferable.
 本発明において用いられるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料は、一次粒子の平均粒子径が0.01~0.30μmのハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニンであることが好ましい。本発明における顔料の一次粒子の平均粒子径は、以下に示す方法により測定した値である。
 本発明における平均一次粒子径とは、透過型電子顕微鏡で視野内の粒子を撮影し、二次元画像上の、凝集体を構成するハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料の一次粒子の100個につき、その長い方の径(長径)と短い方の径(短径)の平均値を各々求め、それを平均した値である。
The zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment used in the present invention is preferably a zinc halide phthalocyanine having an average primary particle diameter of 0.01 to 0.30 μm. The average particle diameter of the primary particles of the pigment in the present invention is a value measured by the following method.
The average primary particle diameter in the present invention is the longer one of 100 primary particles of a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment constituting an aggregate on a two-dimensional image obtained by photographing particles in the field of view with a transmission electron microscope. The average value of the diameter (major axis) and the shorter diameter (minor axis) is obtained and averaged.
 本発明の組成物には、ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料が、1種のみ用いられてもよく、複数種を組み合わせて用いてもよい。例えば、前記一般式(F)において、臭素原子及び塩素原子から選択されるハロゲン原子の置換数が互いに異なる複数種の、特定のハロゲン原子組成のポリハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を特定割合にて含有するものであってもよい。
 好ましい態様としては、臭素原子を16個含有するポリハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料と、臭素原子を15個と塩素原子を1個含有するポリハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料との組み合わせなどが挙げられる。また、両者の割合としては、80:20~100:0の範囲であることが好ましい。
In the composition of the present invention, only one kind of zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment may be used, or a plurality of kinds may be used in combination. For example, in the general formula (F), a plurality of types of polyhalogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments having a specific halogen atom composition, each having a different number of substitutions of halogen atoms selected from bromine atoms and chlorine atoms, are contained in a specific ratio. It may be a thing.
Preferable embodiments include a combination of a polyhalogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment containing 16 bromine atoms and a polyhalogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment containing 15 bromine atoms and one chlorine atom. The ratio of the two is preferably in the range of 80:20 to 100: 0.
 本発明の硬化性組成物に含まれる(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料の平均組成は、マススペクトロスコピーに基づく質量分析と、フラスコ燃焼イオンクロマトグラフによるハロゲン含有量分析から求められ、ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料組成物中の個々の特定ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料の含有モル%も、同様に質量分析の結果を解析することにより、容易に求められる。
 本発明に好適に用いうるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料は、特開2007-320986公報、特開2008-19383号公報に記載の方法により製造することができる。
The average composition of the (A) zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment contained in the curable composition of the present invention is determined by mass spectrometry based on mass spectroscopy and halogen content analysis by flask combustion ion chromatography, Similarly, the mole% of each specific zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment contained in the pigment composition can be easily determined by analyzing the results of mass spectrometry.
The zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment that can be suitably used in the present invention can be produced by the method described in JP-A-2007-320986 and JP-A-2008-19383.
 ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58が挙げられる。 As the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Green 58.
 本発明の組成物におけるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料の量は、全顔料成分の20~100質量%であることが好ましく、30~90質量%であることがより好ましく、40~80質量%であることがさらに好ましい。 The amount of the zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment in the composition of the present invention is preferably 20 to 100% by mass of the total pigment component, more preferably 30 to 90% by mass, and 40 to 80% by mass. Is more preferable.
-その他の顔料-
 本発明の組成物は、ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料以外の他の顔料を含んでいても良い。具体的には、特開2012-219106号公報の段落番号0046~0052に記載のものを採用でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。本発明では、黄色顔料が好ましい。他の顔料は、1種のみ用いても良いし、2種以上用いても良い。
-Other pigments-
The composition of the present invention may contain a pigment other than the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment. Specifically, those described in JP-A-2012-219106, paragraphs 0046 to 0052 can be adopted, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. In the present invention, a yellow pigment is preferred. Other pigments may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 有機顔料としては、例えばアゾ顔料、アゾメチン顔料、イソインドリン顔料、キノフタロン顔料などが挙げられる。中でも、分散安定性という理由により、アゾ顔料、イソインドリン顔料が好ましく、具体的には、例えば、C.I.ピグメントイエロー11,24,31,53,83,93,99,108,109,110,138,139,147,150,151,154,155,167,180,185,199などが挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150(アゾ顔料)、C.I.ピグメントイエロー139,185(イソインドリン顔料)が好ましい。
Examples of organic pigments include azo pigments, azomethine pigments, isoindoline pigments, and quinophthalone pigments. Of these, azo pigments and isoindoline pigments are preferred for the reason of dispersion stability. I. Pigment yellow 11,24,31,53,83,93,99,108,109,110,138,139,147,150,151,154,155,167,180,185,199.
Among these, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 (azo pigment), C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139,185 (isoindoline pigment) is preferable.
 本発明で用いるその他の顔料としては、その他の顔料を構成する分子中に環構造を1つまたは2つ有することが好ましい。ここで、縮合環は縮合環全体で1つの環構造とする。
 環構造が3つ以上の顔料よりも、環構造が1つまたは2つの顔料の方がより分子間相互作用が小さい方向であるため、分散(微粒子化)時に顔料が解れ易いと考えられる。また、顔料が解れることでその粒子数が増加すると、ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料への吸着が起こり易くなり、凝集力の強いフタロシアニン同士の再凝集を抑制するため、輝度ムラに寄与する粗大粒子や粘度安定性(増粘抑制)に効果があるものと推定される。顔料を構成する分子中に環構造を1つまたは2つ有する顔料は黄色顔料であることが好ましく、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150、C.I.ピグメントイエロー185がより好ましい。
The other pigment used in the present invention preferably has one or two ring structures in the molecule constituting the other pigment. Here, the condensed ring has one ring structure as a whole.
Since pigments having one or two ring structures have a smaller intermolecular interaction direction than pigments having three or more ring structures, it is considered that the pigments can be easily released during dispersion (particulate formation). In addition, when the number of particles increases due to the dissolution of the pigment, adsorption to the halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment is likely to occur. Presumably effective in viscosity stability (inhibition of thickening). The pigment having one or two ring structures in the molecule constituting the pigment is preferably a yellow pigment. I. Pigment yellow 150, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 is more preferable.
 本発明の組成物は、(A)顔料以外の公知の染料を含んでいてもよい。例えば特開昭64-90403号公報、特開昭64-91102号公報、特開平1-94301号公報、特開平6-11614号公報、特登2592207号、米国特許4808501号明細書、米国特許5667920号明細書、米国特許505950号明細書、特開平5-333207号公報、特開平6-35183号公報、特開平6-51115号公報、特開平6-194828号公報等に開示されている色素を使用できる。化学構造としては、ピラゾールアゾ系、ピロメテン系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系等の染料を使用できる。
 また、染料としては色素多量体を用いてもよい。色素多量体としては、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
The composition of the present invention may contain (A) a known dye other than the pigment. For example, JP-A-64-90403, JP-A-64-91102, JP-A-1-94301, JP-A-6-11614, Tokuho 2592207, U.S. Pat. No. 4,808,501, U.S. Pat. No. 5, U.S. Pat. No. 505950, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6-51115, JP-A-6-194828, etc. Can be used. The chemical structure includes pyrazole azo, pyromethene, anilinoazo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, etc. Dyes can be used.
A dye multimer may be used as the dye. Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A and JP2013-041097A.
 本発明の組成物における顔料の含有量は、フタロシアニン顔料と他の顔料の合計で、着色感光性樹脂組成物に含有される溶剤を除いた全成分に対して、40質量%以上が好ましく、より好ましくは45~70質量%であり、さらに好ましくは50~65質量%である。本発明の組成物は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で染料も含んでいても良く、染料を含む場合、着色剤(染料および顔料)の合計が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
 顔料は、本発明の組成物中に1種のみ含まれていても良いし、2種以上含まれていても良い。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the pigment in the composition of the present invention is preferably 40% by mass or more based on the total amount of the phthalocyanine pigment and other pigments, excluding the solvent contained in the colored photosensitive resin composition. The amount is preferably 45 to 70% by mass, and more preferably 50 to 65% by mass. The composition of the present invention may contain a dye within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention. When the dye is included, the total of the colorants (dye and pigment) is preferably within the above range.
Only one kind of pigment may be contained in the composition of the present invention, or two or more kinds thereof may be contained. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<(B)色素誘導体>>
 本発明の組成物は、(B)色素誘導体として、(B-1)一般式(I)で表される色素誘導体および/または(B-2)一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体を含む。以下、(B-1)一般式(I)で表される色素誘導体、および(B-2)一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体について説明する。
<< (B) Dye derivative >>
The composition of the present invention comprises (B-1) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (I) and / or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by the general formula (II) as the dye derivative (B). Including. Hereinafter, (B-1) the dye derivative represented by the general formula (I) and (B-2) the dye derivative represented by the general formula (II) will be described.
-(B-1)一般式(I)で表される色素誘導体-
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 一般式(I)中、Dyeはn価の有機色素残基を表し、Xは単結合、-CONH-Y-、-SONH-Y-または-CHNHCOCHNH-Y-(Yは置換基を有していても良いアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。)を表し、Yは-NH-または-O-を表し、Zは、nが1を表す場合は水酸基、アルコキシ基、下記一般式(III)で表される基、または-NH-X-Dye(Xは一般式(I)中のXと同義である)を表し、nが2~4の整数を表す場合はそれぞれ水酸基、アルコキシ基、または下記一般式(III)で表される基を表し、RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。mは1~6の整数を表し、nは1~4の整数を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数のX、Y、R、およびRは、それぞれ、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 一般式(III)中、Yは-NH-または-O-を表す。RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。mは1~6の整数を表す。
-(B-1) Dye derivative represented by general formula (I)-
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
In general formula (I), Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue, and X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 —, or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —. (Y 2 represents an optionally substituted alkylene group or arylene group), Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—, Z represents a hydroxyl group when n represents 1, Represents an alkoxy group, a group represented by the following general formula (III), or —NH—X-Dye (where X is the same as X in the general formula (I)), and n represents an integer of 2 to 4 hydroxyl case each represent an alkoxy group or a group of the following formula (III),, R 1 or R 2 are each represents an alkyl group optionally having a substituent, R 1 and R 2 May combine with each other to form a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom. m represents an integer of 1 to 6, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4. When n is 2 or more, the plurality of X, Y 1 , R 1 , and R 2 may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
In general formula (III), Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom. m represents an integer of 1 to 6.
 Dyeはn価の有機色素残基を表す。有機色素残基としては、前記の如く顔料における発色原子団、その類似構造、或いは部分構造が挙げられ、具体的には、アゾ基を有する骨格、ウレア構造を有する骨格、アミド構造を有する骨格、環状アミド構造を有する骨格、ヘテロ原子含有5員環を有する芳香族環、及び、ヘテロ原子含有6員環を有する芳香族環から選択される1種以上の部分構造を含む構造が挙げられ、Dyeはこれらの有機色素残基を含む置換基である。
 Dyeとしては、好ましくは顔料母核構造、又は顔料母核構造と芳香環、或いは含窒素芳香環、或いは含酸素芳香環、或いは含硫黄芳香環を有し、アミノ基は顔料母核構造、芳香環、含窒素芳香環、含酸素芳香環、含硫黄芳香環のいずれかに直接或いは連結基により結合されている。具体的には、キノリン系残基、ベンズイミダゾロン系残基、イソインドリン系残基、ジケトピロロピロール系残基、アゾ系残基、フタロシアニン系残基、アントラキノン系残基、キナクリドン系残基、ジオキサジン系残基、ペリノン系残基、ペリレン系残基、チオインジゴ系残基、イソインドリノン系残基、キノフタロン系残基、スレン系残基、金属錯体系残基等が挙げられる。
Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue. Examples of the organic dye residue include a chromogenic group in the pigment as described above, a similar structure, or a partial structure thereof. Specifically, a skeleton having an azo group, a skeleton having a urea structure, a skeleton having an amide structure, Examples include a structure containing one or more partial structures selected from a skeleton having a cyclic amide structure, an aromatic ring having a heteroatom-containing 5-membered ring, and an aromatic ring having a heteroatom-containing 6-membered ring, and Dye Is a substituent containing these organic dye residues.
The dye preferably has a pigment mother nucleus structure, or a pigment mother nucleus structure and an aromatic ring, a nitrogen-containing aromatic ring, an oxygen-containing aromatic ring, or a sulfur-containing aromatic ring, and the amino group has a pigment mother nucleus structure, an aromatic ring It is bonded directly or through a linking group to any of the ring, nitrogen-containing aromatic ring, oxygen-containing aromatic ring and sulfur-containing aromatic ring. Specifically, quinoline residue, benzimidazolone residue, isoindoline residue, diketopyrrolopyrrole residue, azo residue, phthalocyanine residue, anthraquinone residue, quinacridone residue , Dioxazine residues, perinone residues, perylene residues, thioindigo residues, isoindolinone residues, quinophthalone residues, selenium residues, metal complex residues and the like.
 Dyeが表す有機色素残基としては、具体的には、銅フタロシアニン残基、以下の有機色素残基などが挙げられる。式中、*は一般式(I)中のXとの結合部位を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Specific examples of the organic dye residue represented by Dye include a copper phthalocyanine residue and the following organic dye residues. In the formula, * represents a binding site with X in the general formula (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 これらの中でも、ベンズイミダゾロン骨格を有するモノアゾ色素が好ましい。 Among these, monoazo dyes having a benzimidazolone skeleton are preferable.
 Xは、単結合、-CONH-Y-、-SONH-Y-または-CHNHCOCHNH-Y-を表し、単結合が好ましい。
 Yは置換基を有していても良いアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。前記アルキレン基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~3のアルキレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基などが挙げられる。アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
 前記アリーレン基としては、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基が好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基がより好ましい。具体的には、フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基などが挙げられる。
 アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 — or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —, and preferably a single bond.
Y 2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group which may have a substituent. The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, and a hexylene group. The alkylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
The arylene group is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
 Yは-NH-または-O-を表し、-NH-が好ましい。 Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—, preferably —NH—.
 RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。
 前記アルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、n-へキシル基、n-オクチル基等が挙げられる。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
 RおよびRは同一の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表すことが好ましい。
R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom.
As the alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group. The alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
R 1 and R 2 preferably represent an alkyl group which may have the same substituent.
 mは1~6の整数を表し、1~4が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 nは1~4の整数を表し、1~3が好ましく、1または2がより好ましい。
m represents an integer of 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 3.
n represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
 Zは、nが1を表す場合は水酸基、アルコキシ基、上記一般式(III)で表される基、または-NH-X-Dye(Xは一般式(I)中のXと同義である)を表し、nが2~4の整数を表す場合はそれぞれ水酸基、アルコキシ基、または上記一般式(III)で表される基を表す。
 nが1を表す場合、Zは、上記一般式(III)で表される基、または-NH-X-Dyeが好ましく、上記一般式(III)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
 nが2~4の整数を表す場合、Zは、上記一般式(III)で表される基であることが好ましい。
Z is a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a group represented by the above general formula (III), or —NH—X—Dye (where X is the same as X in the general formula (I)) when n represents 1. And n represents an integer of 2 to 4, each represents a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or a group represented by the above general formula (III).
When n represents 1, Z is preferably a group represented by the above general formula (III) or —NH—X-Dye, and more preferably a group represented by the above general formula (III).
When n represents an integer of 2 to 4, Z is preferably a group represented by the above general formula (III).
 一般式(III)中、Yは-NH-または-O-を表し、-NH-が好ましい。Yは一般式(I)におけるYと同一の基を表すことが好ましい。 In general formula (III), Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—, preferably —NH—. Y 3 preferably represents the same group as Y 1 in formula (I).
 一般式(III)におけるRおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、一般式(I)におけるRおよびRと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。一般式(III)におけるRおよびRは、同一の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表すことが好ましい。また、一般式(III)におけるRおよびRは、一般式(I)におけるRおよびRと同一の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表すことが好ましい。 R 1 and R 2 are in the formula (III), represents an optionally substituted alkyl group has the same meaning as R 1 and R 2 in formula (I), and preferred ranges are also the same . R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (III) preferably represent an alkyl group which may have the same substituent. Moreover, it is preferable that R < 1 > and R < 2 > in general formula (III) represent the alkyl group which may have the same substituent as R < 1 > and R < 2 > in general formula (I).
 mは1~6の整数を表し、1~4が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。mは一般式(I)におけるmと同一の整数を表すことが好ましい。 M represents an integer of 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 3. m preferably represents the same integer as m in formula (I).
 以下、本発明に用いられる塩基性色素誘導体の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the basic dye derivative used in the present invention will be shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
-(B-2)一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体-
一般式(II)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 一般式(II)中、Dyeは置換基を有していてもよいキノフタロン残基を表し、Xは、-NR’SO-、-SONR’-、-CONR’-、-CHNR’COCHNR’-、または-NR’CO-を表し、Xは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が4~20の複素芳香環基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-または-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。Xは、-NR’-または-O-を表す。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。AおよびBは、それぞれ、下記一般式(1)で表される基、下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH-R、-OR、-NR1011、-Cl、-Fおよび-X-X-X-Dyeから選ばれる基を表し、Rは置換されていてもよい含窒素複素環残基を表し、R、R10、R11は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20アルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、nは0~20の整数を表す。AおよびBのいずれか一方は、下記一般式(1)で表される基、下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH)n-R、-ORまたは-NR1011であり、tは1~3の整数を表す。tが2以上の場合、複数のX、X、X、A、およびBは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 一般式(1)中、Yは-NR’-または-O-を表し、Yは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-、-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。RとRが一体となって複素環構造を形成してもよく、当該複素環構造は、更なる窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも、置換基を有していてもよい。
一般式(2)中、Zはトリアジン環と窒素原子を結ぶ単結合、-NR’-、-NR’-G-CO-、-NR’-G-CONR’’-、-NR’-G-SO-、-NR’-G-SONR’’-、-O-G-CO-、-O-G-CONR’-、-O-G-SO-または-O-G-SONR’-を表し、Gは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、R、R、およびRはそれぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、Rは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。)
-(B-2) Dye derivative represented by general formula (II)-
Formula (II)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
In the general formula (II), Dye represents an optionally substituted quinophthalone residue, and X 1 represents —NR′SO 2 —, —SO 2 NR′—, —CONR′—, —CH 2 NR′COCH 2 NR′— or —NR′CO—, wherein X 2 may have a substituent, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent Represents a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and these groups are bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO—. May be. X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. A and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n —R 8 , —OR 9 , —NR 10 R 11 represents a group selected from —Cl, —F and —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, R 9 , R 10 R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent. An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, and n represents an integer of 0 to 20. One of A and B is a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n—R 8 , —OR 9 or — NR 10 R 11 and t represents an integer of 1 to 3. When t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , A, and B may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
In general formula (1), Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—, and Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may contain a further nitrogen atom, oxygen atom or sulfur atom, or may have a substituent.
In the general formula (2), Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ″ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ″ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent. Represents an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, R ′ and R ″ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group. An alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent. Represents an alkenyl group having 20 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 7 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Alternatively, it represents an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. )
 一般式(II)中、Dyeは、置換基を有していてもよいキノフタロン残基を表す。キノフタロン残基としては、具体的には以下の一般式(II-1)で表される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 一般式(II-1)中、DおよびEはそれぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、DおよびEが結合するベンゼン環とともに形成される、置換基を有してもよい芳香環基または複素環基、ヒドロキシル基、炭素数1~3のアルコキシル基、カルボキシル基あるいはその塩、炭素数1~20のエステル、炭素数1~20のアミド、スルホン基あるいはその塩、スルファモイル基、-NR’R’’-、ニトロ基から選ばれるいずれかの基を表す。式中、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。pは0~4の整数を表し、qは4-pで算出される整数を表す。*は、一般式(II)におけるXとの結合部位を表す。
In general formula (II), Dye represents the quinophthalone residue which may have a substituent. The quinophthalone residue is specifically represented by the following general formula (II-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
In general formula (II-1), D and E each have a substituent formed with a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a benzene ring to which D and E are bonded. Good aromatic or heterocyclic group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, carboxyl group or salt thereof, ester having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, amide having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, sulfone group or salt thereof, sulfamoyl Represents any group selected from a group, —NR′R ″ —, and a nitro group. In the formula, each of R ′ and R ″ is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group or a substituent. p represents an integer of 0 to 4, and q represents an integer calculated by 4-p. * Represents a binding site with X 1 in the general formula (II).
 DおよびEはそれぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、DおよびEが結合するベンゼン環とともに形成される、置換基を有してもよい芳香環基または複素環基、ヒドロキシル基、炭素数1~3のアルコキシル基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基)、カルボキシル基あるいはその塩、炭素数1~20のエステル、炭素数1~20のアミド、スルホン基あるいはその塩、スルファモイル基、-NR’R’’-、ニトロ基から選ばれるいずれかの基を表す。R’およびR’’は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 炭素数1~20のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、n-へキシル基、n-オクチル基等が挙げられる。
 芳香環基または複素環基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、チオフェン環基、ピリジン環基、ピロール環基などが挙げられる。
 DおよびEが表わす芳香環基または複素環基、R’およびR’’が表わす炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、および炭素数6~20のアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、DおよびEは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子であることが好ましい。
D and E are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent formed together with a benzene ring to which D and E are bonded; A hydroxyl group, an alkoxyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group), carboxyl group or a salt thereof, an ester having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an amide having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a sulfone group or the like It represents any group selected from a salt, a sulfamoyl group, —NR′R ″ —, and a nitro group. R ′ and R ″ are each a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituted group. An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group.
As the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group.
Examples of the aromatic ring group or the heterocyclic group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a thiophene ring group, a pyridine ring group, and a pyrrole ring group.
The aromatic or heterocyclic group represented by D and E, the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, the alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms and the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R ′ and R ″ are: It may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
Among these, it is preferable that D and E are a hydrogen atom and a halogen atom.
 pは、0~4の整数を表し、1~4の整数がより好ましく、4がさらに好ましい。qは、4-pで算出される整数を表し、具体的には、0~3の整数が好ましく、2~3がより好ましく、4がさらに好ましい。 P represents an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and still more preferably 4. q represents an integer calculated by 4-p, specifically, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 2 to 3, and still more preferably 4.
 一般式(II)におけるXとの結合部位としては、特に制限はないが、キノフタロン残基中のキノリン骨格の5位または8位が結合部位であることが好ましく8位が結合部位であることがより好ましい。 The binding site with X 1 in the general formula (II) is not particularly limited, but the 5th or 8th position of the quinoline skeleton in the quinophthalone residue is preferably a binding site, and the 8th position is a binding site. Is more preferable.
 一般式(II)中、Xは、-NR’SO-、-SONR’-、-CONR’-、-CHNR’COCHNR’-、または-NR’CO-を表し、-NR’SO-が好ましい。なお、tが2以上の場合、複数のXは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。 In formula (II), X 1 is, -NR'SO 2 -, - SO 2 NR '-, - CONR' -, - CH 2 NR'COCH 2 NR'-, or -NR'CO- represent, —NR′SO 2 — is preferred. When t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 may be the same or different.
 上記X中のR’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
 前記炭素数が1~20のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、n-へキシル基、n-オクチル基等が挙げられる。
 前記炭素数2~20のアルケニル基としては、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基が好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルケニル基がより好ましい。具体的には、ビニル基、プロペニル基、ブテニル基、ペンテニル基、ヘキセニル基などが挙げられる。
 前記炭素数6~20のアリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基などが挙げられる。
 これらは、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
R ′ in X 1 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Alternatively, it represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and a hydrogen atom is preferable.
The alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group.
The alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a vinyl group, a propenyl group, a butenyl group, a pentenyl group, and a hexenyl group.
The aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and specific examples include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthracenyl group.
These may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
 一般式(II)中、Xは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が4~20の複素芳香環基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-または-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい(R’は上記X中のR’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。)。なお、tが2以上の場合、複数のXは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 炭素数6~20のアリーレン基は、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基が好ましく、具体的には、フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基などが挙げられる。
 炭素数4~20の複素芳香環基は、炭素数4~10の複素芳香環基が好ましく、具体的には、チオフェン環基、ピリジン環基、ピロール環基などが挙げられる。
 これらは、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
In general formula (II), X 2 is an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a heteroaromatic ring having 4 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. And these groups may be bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO— (R ′ represents the above X 1). It is synonymous with R ′ in the middle, and the preferred range is also the same.). When t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 2 may be the same or different.
The arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and specific examples thereof include a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
The heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, and specific examples include a thiophene ring group, a pyridine ring group, and a pyrrole ring group.
These may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
 Xは、-NR’-または-O-を表し、-NR’-が好ましい。なお、tが2以上の場合、複数のXは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。R’は上記R’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—, preferably —NR′—. When t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 3 may be the same or different. R ′ has the same meaning as R ′ above, and the preferred range is also the same.
 AおよびBは、それぞれ、下記一般式(1)、もしくは下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH-R、-OR、-NR1011、-Cl、-Fまたは-X-X-X-Dyeから選ばれる基を表し、AおよびBのいずれか一方は、下記一般式(1)もしくは(2)で表される基、-O-(CH)n-R、-OR、または-NR1011である。中でも、AおよびBは、ともに下記一般式(1)、または下記一般式(2)で表される基が好ましく、AおよびBは下記一般式(1)、または下記一般式(2)で表される基であり、かつAおよびBが同一の基であることがより好ましい。 A and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1) or the following general formula (2), -O- (CH 2 ) n -R 8, -OR 9, -NR 10 R 11, - Represents a group selected from Cl, —F or —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, and one of A and B is a group represented by the following formula (1) or (2), —O -(CH 2 ) n-R 8 , -OR 9 , or -NR 10 R 11 . Among them, A and B are preferably groups represented by the following general formula (1) or the following general formula (2), and A and B are represented by the following general formula (1) or the following general formula (2). More preferably, A and B are the same group.
 Rは置換されていてもよい含窒素複素環残基を表し、具体的には、ピロール環残基、ピリジン環残基などが挙げられる。
 R、R10、R11は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20アルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、R10、R11は、上記R’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, and specific examples thereof include a pyrrole ring residue and a pyridine ring residue.
R 9 , R 10 and R 11 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group or a substituent. R 9 , R 10 and R 11 have the same meaning as R ′ described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
一般式(1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 一般式(1)中、Yは-NR’-または-O-を表し、Yは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-、-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、Rは各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す(RとRが一体となって複素環構造を形成してもよく、当該複素環構造は、更なる窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも、置換基を有していてもよい。
General formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
In general formula (1), Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—, and Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. (R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may further contain a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, or may have a substituent. .
 Yは-NR’-または-O-を表し、-NR’-が好ましい。R’は上記R’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—, preferably —NR′—. R ′ has the same meaning as R ′ above, and the preferred range is also the same.
 Yは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-、-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい(R’は上記R’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。)。
 前記炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~3のアルキレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基などが挙げられる。アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
 前記炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基としては、炭素数2~10のアルケニレン基が好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルケニレン基がより好ましく、炭素数2~3のアルケニレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、ビニレン基、プロピニレン基、ブチニレン基、ペンチニレン基、ヘキシニレン基などが挙げられる。アルケニレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
 前記炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基としては、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基が好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基がより好ましい。具体的には、フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基などが挙げられる。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。
Y 2 may have an optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted group. And an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, which are bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 —, and —CO—. (R ′ has the same meaning as R ′ above, and the preferred range is also the same).
The alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and further preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, and a hexylene group. The alkylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
The alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and further preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include vinylene group, propynylene group, butynylene group, pentynylene group, hexynylene group and the like. The alkenylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
The arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group. The arylene group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent.
 R、Rは各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す(RとRが一体となって複素環構造を形成してもよく、当該複素環構造は、更なる窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも、置換基を有していてもよい。
 前記炭素数が1~20のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、n-へキシル基、n-オクチル基等が挙げられる。
 前記炭素数2~20のアルケニル基としては、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基が好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルケニル基がより好ましい。具体的には、ビニル基、プロペニル基、ブテニル基、ペンテニル基、ヘキセニル基などが挙げられる。
 これらの基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、前記置換基の項で述べた基が挙げられる。R、Rは、同一の基を表すことが好ましい。
R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. (R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may further contain a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, or may have a substituent. .
The alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group.
The alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a vinyl group, a propenyl group, a butenyl group, a pentenyl group, and a hexenyl group.
These groups may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups described in the section of the substituent. R 1 and R 2 preferably represent the same group.
一般式(2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 一般式(2)中、Zはトリアジン環と窒素原子を結ぶ単結合、-NR’-、-NR’-G-CO-、-NR’-G-CONR’’-、-NR’-G-SO-、-NR’-G-SONR’’-、-O-G-CO-、-O-G-CONR’-、-O-G-SO-または-O-G-SONR’-を表し、Gは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、R、R、およびRはそれぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、Rは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。
General formula (2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
In the general formula (2), Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ″ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ″ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent. Represents an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, R ′ and R ″ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group. An alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent. Represents an alkenyl group having 20 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 7 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Alternatively, it represents an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
 Zはトリアジン環と窒素原子を結ぶ単結合、-NR’-、-NR’-G-CO-、N
R’-G-CONR’’-、-NR’-G-SO-、-NR’-G-SONR’’-、-O-G-CO-、-O-G-CONR’-、-O-G-SO-または-O-G-SONR’-を表し、単結合が好ましい。
 R’およびR’’は、それぞれ水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R’およびR’’は、一般式(1)中のR’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 Gは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表す。Gは、一般式(1)におけるYと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, N
R′—G—CONR ″ —, —NR′—G—SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ″ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, It represents —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 NR′—, and preferably a single bond.
R ′ and R ″ are each a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, Alternatively, it represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R ′ and R ″ are synonymous with R ′ in the general formula (1), and preferred ranges thereof are also the same.
G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an optionally substituted carbon. It represents an arylene group having a number of 6 to 20. G has the same meaning as Y 2 in the general formula (1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 R、R、R、およびRはそれぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、R、R、およびRは、一般式(1)中のR’と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent. Represents an alkenyl group having ˜20 or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 have the same meaning as R ′ in the general formula (1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 Rは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。Rは、一般式(1)中のRと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 R 7 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 7 has the same meaning as R 1 in the general formula (1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 一般式(II)におけるtは、1~3の整数を表し、1または2が好ましく、1がより好ましい。 T in the general formula (II) represents an integer of 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
 以下、本発明に用いられる一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, although the specific example of the pigment derivative represented by general formula (II) used for this invention is shown, this invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 本発明における(B)色素誘導体の含有量としては、フタロシアニン顔料と他の顔料の合計100質量部に対して、0.5質量部以上50質量部以下であることが好ましく、1質量部以上25質量部以下であることがより好ましい。
 色素誘導体は、本発明の組成物中に1種のみ含まれていても良いし、2種以上含まれていても良い。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the (B) pigment derivative in the present invention is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and preferably 1 part by mass or more and 25 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the phthalocyanine pigment and other pigments. It is more preferable that the amount is not more than part by mass.
Only 1 type may be contained in the composition of this invention, and 2 or more types may be contained for the pigment derivative. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<(C)分散剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、(C)分散剤を含有し、前記分散剤の含有量は顔料100質量部に対し20~40質量部である。本発明では、分散剤の含有量が少なくても良好な分散物が得られるので、良好なリソグラフィー(解像性)、パターン直線性、パターンの同色画素間の安定性および輝度ムラに優れるようになる。本発明における(C)分散剤の含有量は、フタロシアニン顔料と他の顔料の合計100質量部に対し22~38質量部が好ましく、25~35質量部がより好ましい。
 分散剤は、本発明の組成物中に1種のみ含まれていても良いし、2種以上含まれていても良い。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< (C) Dispersant >>
The composition of the present invention contains (C) a dispersant, and the content of the dispersant is 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. In the present invention, a good dispersion can be obtained even if the content of the dispersing agent is small, so that excellent lithography (resolution), pattern linearity, stability between pixels of the same color in the pattern, and luminance unevenness are excellent. Become. In the present invention, the content of the (C) dispersant is preferably 22 to 38 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 35 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the phthalocyanine pigment and other pigments.
Only 1 type of dispersing agent may be contained in the composition of this invention, and may be contained 2 or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
 本発明に用いうる分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、および、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、アルカノールアミン等の界面活性剤、および、顔料誘導体等を挙げることができる。
 高分子分散剤は、その構造からさらに直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。
Examples of the dispersant that can be used in the present invention include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (Meth) acrylic copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine, alkanol amine, and pigment derivatives. it can.
The polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer according to the structure.
 顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子としては、例えば、特開平3-112992号公報、特表2003-533455号公報等に記載の末端にりん酸基を有する高分子、特開2002-273191号公報等に記載の末端にスルホン酸基を有する高分子、特開平9-77994号公報等に記載の有機色素の部分骨格や複素環を有する高分子などが挙げられる。また、特開2007-277514号公報に記載の高分子末端に2個以上の顔料表面へのアンカー部位(酸基、塩基性基、有機色素の部分骨格やヘテロ環等)を導入した高分子も分散安定性に優れ好ましい。 Examples of the terminal-modified polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polymer having a phosphate group at the terminal described in JP-A-3-112992, JP-A-2003-533455, and the like. Examples thereof include polymers having a sulfonic acid group at the terminal end described in JP-A-273191 and the like, and polymers having a partial skeleton of an organic dye and a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-9-77994. In addition, polymers having two or more pigment surface anchor sites (acid groups, basic groups, organic dye partial skeletons, heterocycles, etc.) introduced at the polymer ends described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also available. It is preferable because of excellent dispersion stability.
 顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有するグラフト型高分子としては、例えば、ポリエステル系分散剤等が挙げられ、具体的には、特開昭54-37082号公報、特表平8-507960号公報、特開2009-258668号公報等に記載のポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)とポリエステルの反応生成物、特開平9-169821号公報等に記載のポリアリルアミンとポリエステルの反応生成物、特開平10-339949号公報、特開2004-37986号公報、国際公開パンフレットWO2010/110491等に記載のマクロモノマーと、窒素原子モノマーとの共重合体、特開2003-238837号公報、特開2008-9426号公報、特開2008-81732号公報等に記載の有機色素の部分骨格や複素環を有するグラフト型高分子、特開2010-106268号公報等に記載のマクロモノマーと酸基含有モノマーの共重合体等が挙げられる。特に、特開2009-203462号公報に記載の塩基性基と酸性基を有する両性分散樹脂は、顔料分散物の分散性、分散安定性、および顔料分散物を用いた着色感光性樹脂組成物が示す現像性の観点から特に好ましい。 Examples of the graft polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polyester-based dispersant, and specific examples thereof include JP-A-54-37082, JP-A-8-507960, Reaction products of poly (lower alkyleneimine) and polyester described in JP-A-2009-258668, etc., reaction products of polyallylamine and polyester described in JP-A-9-169821, etc., JP-A-10-339949 A copolymer of a macromonomer and a nitrogen atom monomer described in JP-A-2004-37986, International Publication Pamphlet WO 2010/110491, JP-A-2003-238837, JP-A-2008-9426, JP-A Graphs having partial skeletons and heterocyclic rings of organic dyes described in JP-A-2008-81732 Type polymer, and a copolymer of a macromonomer and acid group-containing monomers described in JP 2010-106268 Publication. In particular, the amphoteric dispersion resin having a basic group and an acidic group described in JP-A-2009-203462 is a dispersibility of a pigment dispersion, a dispersion stability, and a colored photosensitive resin composition using the pigment dispersion. It is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of developability.
 顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有するグラフト型高分子をラジカル重合で製造する際に用いるマクロモノマーとしては、公知のマクロモノマーを用いることができ、東亜合成(株)製のマクロモノマーAA-6(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリメタクリル酸メチル)、AS-6(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリスチレン)、AN-6S(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるスチレンとアクリロニトリルの共重合体)、AB-6(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリアクリル酸ブチル)、ダイセル化学工業(株)製のプラクセルFM5(メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチルのε-カプロラクトン5モル当量付加品)、FA10L(アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチルのε-カプロラクトン10モル当量付加品)、および特開平2-272009号公報に記載のポリエステル系マクロモノマー等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、特に柔軟性且つ親溶剤性に優れるポリエステル系マクロモノマーが、顔料分散物の分散性、分散安定性、および顔料分散物を用いた着色感光性樹脂組成物が示す現像性の観点から特に好ましく、さらに、特開平2-272009号公報に記載のポリエステル系マクロモノマーで表されるポリエステル系マクロモノマーが最も好ましい。 As the macromonomer used when the graft polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface is produced by radical polymerization, a known macromonomer can be used. Macromonomer AA-6 (terminal) manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd. Polymethyl methacrylate having a methacryloyl group), AS-6 (polystyrene having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AN-6S (a copolymer of styrene and acrylonitrile having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AB-6 ( Polybutyl acrylate whose end group is a methacryloyl group), Plaxel FM5 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (5-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, ε-caprolactone 5 molar equivalent addition product), FA10L (2-hydroxyethyl acrylate) ε-caprolactone 10 molar equivalent addition product), and JP-A-2-27 Examples thereof include a polyester-based macromonomer described in the 2009 publication. Among these, the polyester-based macromonomer that is particularly excellent in flexibility and solvophilicity is from the viewpoint of the dispersibility of the pigment dispersion, the dispersion stability, and the developability exhibited by the colored photosensitive resin composition using the pigment dispersion. Particularly preferred is a polyester macromonomer represented by the polyester macromonomer described in JP-A-2-272009.
 顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有するブロック型高分子としては、特開2003-49110号公報、特開2009-52010号公報等に記載のブロック型高分子が好ましい。 As the block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface, block polymers described in JP-A Nos. 2003-49110 and 2009-52010 are preferable.
 本発明に用いうる分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、楠木化成株式会社製「DA-7301」、BYKChemie社製「Disperbyk-101(ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩)、107(カルボン酸エステル)、110(酸基を含む共重合物)、130(ポリアミド)、161、162、163、164、165、166、170(高分子共重合物)」、「BYK-P104、P105(高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸)、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050~4010~4165(ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330~4340(ブロック共重合体)、4400~4402(変性ポリアクリレート)、5010(ポリエステルアミド)、5765(高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩)、6220(脂肪酸ポリエステル)、6745(フタロシアニン誘導体)、6750(アゾ顔料誘導体)」、味の素ファンテクノ社製「アジスパーPB821、PB822、PB880、PB881」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンTG-710(ウレタンオリゴマー)」、「ポリフローNo.50E、No.300(アクリル系共重合体)」、楠本化成社製「ディスパロンKS-860、873SN、874、#2150(脂肪族多価カルボン酸)、#7004(ポリエーテルエステル)、DA-703-50、DA-705、DA-725」、花王社製「デモールRN、N(ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)、MS、C、SN-B(芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)」、「ホモゲノールL-18(高分子ポリカルボン酸)」、「エマルゲン920、930、935、985(ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル)」、「アセタミン86(ステアリルアミンアセテート)」、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製「ソルスパース5000(フタロシアニン誘導体)、22000(アゾ顔料誘導体)、13240(ポリエステルアミン)、3000、17000、27000(末端部に機能部を有する高分子)、24000、28000、32000、38500(グラフト型高分子)」、日光ケミカル者製「ニッコールT106(ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート)、MYS-IEX(ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート)」、川研ファインケミカル(株)製 ヒノアクトT-8000E等、信越化学工業(株)製、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341、裕商(株)製「W001:カチオン系界面活性剤」、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル等のノニオン系界面活性剤、「W004、W005、W017」等のアニオン系界面活性剤、森下産業(株)製「EFKA-46、EFKA-47、EFKA-47EA、EFKAポリマー100、EFKAポリマー400、EFKAポリマー401、EFKAポリマー450」、サンノプコ(株)製「ディスパースエイド6、ディスパースエイド8、ディスパースエイド15、ディスパースエイド9100」等の高分子分散剤、(株)ADEKA製「アデカプルロニックL31、F38、L42、L44、L61、L64、F68、L72、P95、F77、P84、F87、P94、L101、P103、F108、L121、P-123」、および三洋化成(株)製「イオネット(商品名)S-20」等が挙げられる。 The dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples thereof include “DA-7301” manufactured by Kashiwagi Kasei Co., Ltd. and “Disperbyk-101 (polyamideamine phosphate) manufactured by BYK Chemie. , 107 (carboxylic acid ester), 110 (copolymer containing an acid group), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104 , P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid), “EFKA 4047, 4050 to 4010 to 4165 (polyurethane type), EFKA 4330 to 4340 (block copolymer), 4400 to 4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyester) manufactured by EFKA Amide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 62 0 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative) ”,“ Ajisper PB821, PB822, PB880, PB881 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fan Techno Co.,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer) ”manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd. , “Polyflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer)”, “Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyether ester) manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd. ), DA-703-50, DA-705, DA-725 ”,“ Demol RN, N (naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate) ”, MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensation) manufactured by Kao Corporation Product) "," homogenol L-18 (polymeric polycarboxylic acid) ", "Emulgen 920, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether)", "Acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate)", "Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative)" manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. 13240 (polyesteramine), 3000, 17000, 27000 (polymer having a functional part at the end), 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft type polymer) ”,“ Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan) manufactured by Nikko Chemical Monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate) ”, Kawaken Fine Chemical Co., Ltd., Hinoact T-8000E, Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., organosiloxane polymer KP341 “W001: Cationic surfactant” manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd., polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene Nonionic surfactants such as glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, anionic surfactants such as “W004, W005, W017”, “EFKA-46, EFKA-47, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.” EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450 ", manufactured by San Nopco" Disperse Aid 6, Disperse Aid 8, Diss Polymer dispersants such as Seid Aid 15 and Disperse Aid 9100, “Adeka Pluronic L31, F38, L42, L44, L61, L64, F68, L72, P95, F77, P84, F87, P94, L101 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation , P103, F108, L121, P-123 ”,“ Ionet (trade name) S-20 ”manufactured by Sanyo Kasei Co., Ltd., and the like.
 これらの分散剤は、単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
本発明においては、特に、顔料誘導体と高分子分散剤とを組み合わせて使用することが好ましい。また、顔料分散剤は、前記顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子と伴に、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と併用して用いても良い。アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体等、並びに側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、が挙げられるが、特に(メタ)アクリル酸共重合体が好ましい。また、特開平10-300922号公報に記載のN位置換マレイミドモノマー共重合体、特開2004-300204号公報に記載のエーテルダイマー共重合体、特開平7-319161号公報に記載の重合性基を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂も好ましい。
 また、以下の構造を有する分散剤を用いることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(上記において、aは、2.0、bは4.0、酸価10mgKOH/g、Mw20000である。また、a及びbは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a+b=6を満たす。)
These dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant. The pigment dispersant may be used in combination with an alkali-soluble resin together with a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, or a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface. Alkali-soluble resins include (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partially esterified maleic acid copolymer, etc., and carboxylic acid in the side chain. Examples thereof include acidic cellulose derivatives, and (meth) acrylic acid copolymers are particularly preferable. Further, N-substituted maleimide monomer copolymers described in JP-A-10-300922, an ether dimer copolymer described in JP-A-2004-300204, and a polymerizable group described in JP-A-7-319161. An alkali-soluble resin containing is also preferred.
It is also preferable to use a dispersant having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(In the above, a is 2.0, b is 4.0, acid value is 10 mg KOH / g, and Mw 20000. Moreover, a and b each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses, and a + b = 6 is satisfied.)
 本発明では、(C)分散剤として、特に、片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基とトリカルボン酸無水物またはテトラカルボン酸二無水物とを反応してなる分散剤を用いることが好ましい。以下、片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基とトリカルボン酸無水物またはテトラカルボン酸二無水物とを反応してなる分散剤について説明する。このような化合物を用いることにより、(B)顔料誘導体が有する複素環との間での吸着力が向上し、本発明の効果がより効果的に発揮される。 In the present invention, as the dispersant (C), in particular, a dispersant obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride is used. preferable. Hereinafter, the dispersant obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic acid anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride will be described. By using such a compound, the adsorptive power between the (B) pigment derivative and the heterocyclic ring is improved, and the effects of the present invention are more effectively exhibited.
-片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体-
 片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体としては、下記一般式(1)で示される重合体が好ましい。一般式(1)で表される重合体はエチレン性不飽和単量体を重合せしめたビニル系重合体である。
一般式(1)
-Vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end-
The vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end is preferably a polymer represented by the following general formula (1). The polymer represented by the general formula (1) is a vinyl polymer obtained by polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
General formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 一般式(1)中、Yは、ビニル重合体の重合停止基を表し、Zは、-OH、又はR28(OH)を表し、R28は、炭素数1~18の3価の炭化水素基を表し、R21及びR22は、それぞれ水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R23及びR24は、いずれか一方が水素原子を表し、他の一方が芳香族基、又は-C(=O)-X-R25(但し、Xは、-O-若しくは-N(R26)-を表し、R25及びR26は、それぞれ水素原子又は炭素数1~18の直鎖状若しくは分岐状の、置換基として芳香族基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す)、Xは、単結合、-O-R27-又はS-R27-を表し、R27は、炭素数1~18の直鎖状若しくは分岐状のアルキレン基を表し、nは、2~50の整数を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
In the general formula (1), Y 2 represents a polymerization termination group of the vinyl polymer, Z 2 represents —OH or R 28 (OH) 2 , and R 28 represents a trivalent having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. R 21 and R 22 each represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, one of R 23 and R 24 represents a hydrogen atom, the other represents an aromatic group, or —C (═O) —X 6 —R 25 (where X 6 represents —O— or —N (R 26 ) —, and R 25 and R 26 each represents a hydrogen atom or a straight chain of 1 to 18 carbon atoms) X 4 represents a single bond, —O—R 27 — or S—R 27 —, and R 27 represents a linear or branched alkyl group which may have an aromatic group as a substituent. Represents a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 2 to 50.
 Yは、ビニル重合体の重合停止基を表し、通常のエチレン性不飽和単量体の重合を通常の方法で実施した場合に導入される任意の公知重合停止基である。例えば、重合開始剤由来の基、連鎖移動剤由来の基、溶剤由来の基、又はエチレン性不飽和単量体由来の基であることができる。Yがこれらのいずれの化学構造を有していても、本発明の分散剤は、重合停止基Yの影響を受けずに、その効果を発揮することができる。重合停止基としては、カルボン酸残基、アルコール残基などが挙げられ、カルボン酸残基であることが好ましい。 Y 2 represents a polymerization termination group of the vinyl polymer, and is any known polymerization termination group introduced when polymerization of a normal ethylenically unsaturated monomer is carried out by a usual method. For example, it can be a group derived from a polymerization initiator, a group derived from a chain transfer agent, a group derived from a solvent, or a group derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer. Even if Y 2 has any of these chemical structures, the dispersant of the present invention can exert its effect without being affected by the polymerization termination group Y 2 . Examples of the polymerization termination group include a carboxylic acid residue and an alcohol residue, and a carboxylic acid residue is preferable.
 Zは、-OH、又はR28(OH)を表し、-OHが好ましい。
 R28は、炭素数1~18の3価の炭化水素基を表す。R28は、炭素数1~18の3価の炭化水素基が好ましく、炭素数1~10の3価の炭化水素基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6の3価の炭化水素基がさらに好ましい。3価の炭化水素基としては、メタン、エタン、プロパン、2-メチルプロパン、ブタン、シクロヘプタン、及びシクロへキサン等の炭素数1~18の飽和炭化水素分子から3個の水素原子を除いて形成されるアルカントリイル基、ベンゼン、ナフタレン、アントラセン、テトラセン、ビフェニル、アセナフチレン、フェナレン、ピレン、及びピリジン等の炭素数6~18の芳香族炭化水素分子から3個の水素原子を除いて形成される基等が挙げられ、ベンゼンから3個の水素原子を除いて形成される基が好ましい。
 R21及びR22は、それぞれ水素原子又はメチル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
Z 2 represents —OH or R 28 (OH) 2 and is preferably —OH.
R 28 represents a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. R 28 is preferably a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and further preferably a trivalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. . As the trivalent hydrocarbon group, three hydrogen atoms are removed from a saturated hydrocarbon molecule having 1 to 18 carbon atoms such as methane, ethane, propane, 2-methylpropane, butane, cycloheptane, and cyclohexane. It is formed by removing 3 hydrogen atoms from aromatic hydrocarbon molecules having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as alkanetriyl group, benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, tetracene, biphenyl, acenaphthylene, phenalene, pyrene, and pyridine. The group formed by removing three hydrogen atoms from benzene is preferable.
R 21 and R 22 each represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom.
 R23及びR24は、いずれか一方が水素原子を表し、他の一方が芳香族基、又は-C(=O)-X-R25(但し、Xは、-O-若しくは-N(R26)-を表す。芳香族基は、炭素数6~20の芳香族基が好ましく、炭素数6~14の芳香族基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10の芳香族基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等が挙げられる。
 Xは、-O-または-N(R26)-を表し、R25及びR26は、それぞれ水素原子又は炭素数1~18の直鎖状若しくは分岐状、置換基として芳香族基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。炭素数1~18の直鎖状若しくは分岐状アルキル基としては、炭素数1から10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、n-へキシル基、n-オクチル基等が挙げられる。前記アルキル基が有する置換基としての芳香族基は、炭素数6~20の芳香族基が好ましく、炭素数6~14の芳香族基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10の芳香族基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等が挙げられる。
One of R 23 and R 24 represents a hydrogen atom and the other one is an aromatic group, or —C (═O) —X 6 —R 25 (where X 6 represents —O— or —N (R 26 ) — The aromatic group is preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthracenyl group.
X 6 represents —O— or —N (R 26 ) —, and each of R 25 and R 26 has a hydrogen atom or a linear or branched group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and has an aromatic group as a substituent. Represents an optionally substituted alkyl group. As the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and an n-octyl group. The aromatic group as a substituent of the alkyl group is preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further an aromatic group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. preferable. Specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, etc. are mentioned.
 Xは、単結合、-O-R27-又はS-R27-を表し、S-R27-が好ましい。
 R27は、炭素数1~18の直鎖状若しくは分岐状のアルキレン基を表す。炭素数1~18のアルキレン基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基がより好ましい。具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、イソプロピレン基、ブチレン基、イソブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基などが挙げられる。
X 4 represents a single bond, —O—R 27 — or S—R 27 —, preferably S—R 27 —.
R 27 represents a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. As the alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, an isopropylene group, a butylene group, an isobutylene group, a pentylene group, and a hexylene group.
 nは、2~50の整数を表し、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~30の整数がより好ましい。 N represents an integer of 2 to 50, preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 30.
 前記一般式(1)で示される重合体の繰り返し単位の部分、すなわち、{-〔C(R21)(R23)-C(R22)(R24)〕-}は、相互に同一のものからなる(ホモポリマー)であっても、異なるものからなる(コポリマー)でもよい。前記一般式(1)で示される重合体の好ましい形態は、R21及びR22が、いずれか一方が水素原子、他の一方が水素原子又はメチル基であり、R23及びR24は、いずれか一方が水素原子、他の一方が-C(=O)-O-R29(R29は炭素原子数1~8の直鎖状若しくは分岐状のアルキル基で置換基として芳香族基を有していることができるもの)であり、-X-Zが、-S-CHCH-OH、もしくは-S-CHCH(OH)CH-OH、の場合である。 The part of the repeating unit of the polymer represented by the general formula (1), that is, {— [C (R 21 ) (R 23 ) —C (R 22 ) (R 24 )] n —} is mutually identical (Homopolymer) made of a different material or (copolymer) made of a different material. In a preferred embodiment of the polymer represented by the general formula (1), R 21 and R 22 are either a hydrogen atom, the other is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 23 and R 24 are either One is a hydrogen atom and the other is —C (═O) —O—R 29 (R 29 is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and has an aromatic group as a substituent. And —X 4 —Z 2 is —S—CH 2 CH 2 —OH or —S—CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 —OH.
 前記一般式(1)で示される重合体の製造方法は、特許第5117913号(特開2009-251481号公報)段落0044~0060に記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The method for producing the polymer represented by the general formula (1) can be referred to the description in paragraphs 0044 to 0060 of Japanese Patent No. 5117913 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-251481), the contents of which are incorporated herein.
-トリカルボン酸無水物またはテトラカルボン酸二無水物-
 トリカルボン酸無水物としては、まず、脂肪族トリカルボン酸無水物、又は芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。
-Tricarboxylic anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride-
Examples of the tricarboxylic acid anhydride include an aliphatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride or an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride.
 脂肪族トリカルボン酸無水物としては、例えば、3-カルボキシメチルグルタル酸無水物、1,2,4-ブタントリカルボン酸-1,2-無水物、cis-プロペン-1,2,3-トリカルボン酸-1,2-無水物、1,3,4-シクロペンタントリカルボン酸無水物などが挙げられる。 Examples of the aliphatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride include 3-carboxymethylglutaric acid anhydride, 1,2,4-butanetricarboxylic acid-1,2-anhydride, cis-propene-1,2,3-tricarboxylic acid- 1,2-anhydride, 1,3,4-cyclopentanetricarboxylic acid anhydride and the like.
 芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物としては、例えば、ベンゼントリカルボン酸無水物(1,2,3-ベンゼントリカルボン酸無水物、トリメリット酸無水物(1,2,4-ベンゼントリカルボン酸無水物)など)、ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物(1,2,4-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物、1,4,5-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物、2,3,6-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物、1,2,8-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物など)、3,4,4’-ベンゾフェノントリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルエーテルトリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルトリカルボン酸無水物、2,3,2’-ビフェニルトリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルメタントリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルスルホントリカルボン酸無水物などが挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride include benzene tricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,3-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride, trimellitic acid anhydride (1,2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride), etc.), Naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,4-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,4,5-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3,6-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,2,8-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid Acid anhydride, etc.), 3,4,4′-benzophenone tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4′-biphenyl ether tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4′-biphenyl tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2′-biphenyltricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4′-biphenylmethanetricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4′- Phenyl sulfonic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides.
 トリカルボン酸無水物を使用する場合、上記のうち芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物が好ましい。 When using a tricarboxylic acid anhydride, an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride is preferable among the above.
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物としては、例えば、脂肪族テトラカルボン酸二無水物、芳香族テトラカルボン酸二無水物、又は多環式テトラカルボン酸二無水物が挙げられる。 Examples of the tetracarboxylic dianhydride include aliphatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, and polycyclic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides.
 脂肪族テトラカルボン酸二無水物としては、例えば、1,2,3,4-ブタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-シクロブタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,3-ジメチル-1,2,3,4-シクロブタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-シクロペンタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,5-トリカルボキシシクロペンチル酢酸二無水物、2,3,5,6-テトラカルボキシシクロヘキサン二無水物、2,3,5,6-テトラカルボキシノルボルナン二無水物、3,5,6-トリカルボキシノルボルナン-2-酢酸二無水物、2,3,4,5-テトラヒドロフランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、5-(2,5-ジオキソテトラヒドロフラル)-3-メチル-3-シクロヘキセン-1,2-ジカルボン酸二無水物、ビシクロ[2,2,2]-オクト-7-エン-2,3,5,6-テトラカルボン酸二無水物などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the aliphatic tetracarboxylic dianhydride include 1,2,3,4-butanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, and 1,3-dimethyl. -1,2,3,4-cyclobutanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-cyclopentanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,5-tricarboxycyclopentylacetic dianhydride, 2, 3,5,6-tetracarboxycyclohexane dianhydride, 2,3,5,6-tetracarboxynorbornane dianhydride, 3,5,6-tricarboxynorbornane-2-acetic acid dianhydride, 2,3,4 , 5-tetrahydrofurantetracarboxylic dianhydride, 5- (2,5-dioxotetrahydrofural) -3-methyl-3-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic dianhydride Bicyclo [2,2,2] - such oct-7-ene-2,3,5,6-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride can be mentioned.
 芳香族テトラカルボン酸二無水物としては、例えば、ピロメリット酸二無水物、エチレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、プロピレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、ブチレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルスルホンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ビフェニルスルホンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,8-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルエーテルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジメチルジフェニルシランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-テトラフェニルシランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-フランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4,4’-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルフィド二無水物、4,4’-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン二無水物、4,4’-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)ジフェニルプロパン二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-パーフルオロイソプロピリデンジフタル酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、ビス(フタル酸)フェニルホスフィンオキサイド二無水物、p-フェニレン-ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)二無水物、M-フェニレン-ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)二無水物、ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)-4,4’-ジフェニルエーテル二無水物、ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)-4,4’-ジフェニルメタン二無水物、9,9-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)フルオレン二無水物、9,9-ビス[4-(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)フェニル]フルオレン二無水物などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydride include pyromellitic dianhydride, ethylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, propylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, butylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, 3, 3 ', 4,4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2', 3,3'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ', 4,4'-biphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride 2,2 ′, 3,3′-biphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride Anhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyl ether tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-dimethyldi Phenylsilane tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-tetraphenylsilane tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-furantetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4′- Bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) diphenyl sulfide dianhydride, 4,4′-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) diphenylsulfone dianhydride, 4,4′-bis (3,4-dicarboxy) Phenoxy) diphenylpropane dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-perfluoroisopropylidene diphthalic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, bis (phthal Acid) phenylphosphine oxide dianhydride, p-phenylene-bis (triphenylphthalic acid) dianhydride, M-phenylene-bis (triphenylphthalic acid) dianhydride Bis (triphenylphthalic acid) -4,4′-diphenyl ether dianhydride, bis (triphenylphthalic acid) -4,4′-diphenylmethane dianhydride, 9,9-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) ) Fluorene dianhydride, 9,9-bis [4- (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) phenyl] fluorene dianhydride, and the like.
 多環式テトラカルボン酸二無水物としては、例えば、3,4-ジカルボキシ-1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロ-1-ナフタレンコハク酸二無水物、3,4-ジカルボキシ-1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロ-6-メチル-1-ナフタレンコハク酸二無水物などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the polycyclic tetracarboxylic dianhydride include 3,4-dicarboxy-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphthalene succinic dianhydride, 3,4-dicarboxy-1,2 , 3,4-tetrahydro-6-methyl-1-naphthalene succinic dianhydride.
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物を使用する場合、上記のうち芳香族テトラカルボン酸二無水物が好ましい。 When tetracarboxylic dianhydride is used, aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferable among the above.
 本発明で使用されるトリカルボン酸無水物またはテトラカルボン酸二無水物は、前記に例示した化合物に限らず、どのような構造をしていてもかまわない。これらは単独で用いても、併用してもかまわない。本発明に好ましく使用されるものは、顔料分散体又は各種インクの低粘度化の観点から芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物若しくは芳香族テトラカルボン酸二無水物である。更には、ピロメリット酸二無水物、3,3′,4,4′-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、9,9-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)フルオレン二酸無水物、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、エチレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、トリメリット酸無水物が好ましい。 The tricarboxylic acid anhydride or tetracarboxylic dianhydride used in the present invention is not limited to the compounds exemplified above, and may have any structure. These may be used alone or in combination. What is preferably used in the present invention is an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride or an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride from the viewpoint of reducing the viscosity of the pigment dispersion or various inks. Further, pyromellitic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 9,9-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) fluorene dianhydride, 2, 3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, ethylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester and trimellitic anhydride are preferred.
 次に、片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基と芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物の酸無水物基とを反応させる工程について説明する。 Next, the step of reacting the hydroxyl group of the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with the acid anhydride group of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride will be described.
 片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基のモル数を<H>、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物のカルボン酸無水物基のモル数を<N>としたとき、反応比率は0.3≦<H>/<N>≦3が好ましく、更に好ましくは0.5≦<H>/<N>≦2の場合である。 When the mole number of the hydroxyl group of the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end is <H> and the mole number of the carboxylic acid anhydride group of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride is <N>, the reaction ratio is 0.3. ≦ <H> / <N> ≦ 3 is preferable, and more preferably 0.5 ≦ <H> / <N> ≦ 2.
 片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体と芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物との反応には触媒を用いてもかまわない。 A catalyst may be used for the reaction between the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end and the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride.
 触媒としては、例えば、3級アミン系化合物が使用でき、トリエチルアミン、トリエチレンジアミン、N,N-ジメチルベンジルアミン、N-メチルモルホリン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン、及び1,5-ジアザビシクロ-[4.3.0]-5-ノネン等が挙げられる。 As the catalyst, for example, tertiary amine compounds can be used, such as triethylamine, triethylenediamine, N, N-dimethylbenzylamine, N-methylmorpholine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene. And 1,5-diazabicyclo- [4.3.0] -5-nonene.
 片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基と芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物の酸無水物基との反応は、無溶剤で行ってもよいし、適当な脱水有機溶媒を使用してもよい。反応に使用した溶媒は、反応終了後、蒸留等の操作により取り除くか、あるいはそのまま分散剤の製品の一部として使用することもできる。使用する溶剤は、特に限定はないが、酢酸エチル、酢酸n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、トルエン、キシレン、アセトン、ヘキサン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、及びジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート等が用いられる。これらの溶媒は、2種類以上混合して用いてもよい。 The reaction between the hydroxyl group of the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end and the acid anhydride group of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride may be performed without a solvent, or an appropriate dehydrated organic solvent may be used. . After completion of the reaction, the solvent used in the reaction can be removed by an operation such as distillation, or can be used as it is as a part of the product of the dispersant. The solvent used is not particularly limited, but ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, toluene, xylene, acetone, hexane, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate and the like are used. Two or more of these solvents may be used in combination.
 片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基と芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物の酸無水物基との反応温度は、好ましくは50℃~180℃、より好ましくは60℃~160℃の範囲で行う。反応温度が50℃未満では反応速度が遅く、180℃を超えると反応して開環した酸無水物が、再度環状無水物を生成し、反応が終了しにくくなる場合がある。 The reaction temperature between the hydroxyl group of the vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end and the acid anhydride group of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride is preferably 50 ° C. to 180 ° C., more preferably 60 ° C. to 160 ° C. Do. When the reaction temperature is less than 50 ° C., the reaction rate is slow. When the reaction temperature exceeds 180 ° C., the acid anhydride that has reacted and opened the ring forms a cyclic anhydride again, which may make it difficult to complete the reaction.
<(D)光重合開始剤>
 本発明の組成物は、さらなる感度向上の観点から光重合開始剤を含有する。
 前記光重合開始剤としては、後述する重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよく、モノマーの種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。
 また、前記光重合開始剤は、約300nm~800nm(330nm~500nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50の分子吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。
<(D) Photopolymerization initiator>
The composition of this invention contains a photoinitiator from a viewpoint of the further sensitivity improvement.
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound described later, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
 前記光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime. Examples include oxime compounds such as derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones.
 また、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルーイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物およびその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体およびその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallyl-imidazole dimers, oniums Compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds are preferred.
 さらに好ましくは、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、トリアリールイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、トリアリールイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも一種の化合物が特に好ましい。また、トリアリールイミダゾール化合物は、ベンゾイミダゾールとの混合物であってもよい。
 具体的には、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示される。なお、Phはフェニル基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 トリアリールイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, triarylimidazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, and acetophenone compounds. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of a trihalomethyltriazine compound, an α-aminoketone compound, an oxime compound, a triallylimidazole compound, a benzophenone compound, a triarylimidazole compound, and a benzimidazole compound is particularly preferable. The triarylimidazole compound may be a mixture with benzimidazole.
Specifically, examples of the trihalomethyltriazine compound include the following compounds. Note that Ph is a phenyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Examples of the triarylimidazole compound and the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物としては、市販品も使用でき、例えば、TAZ-107(みどり化学社製)を用いることもできる。
 特に、本発明の組成物を固体撮像素子が備えるカラーフィルタの作製に使用する場合には、微細なパターンをシャープな形状で形成する必要があるために、硬化性とともに未露光部に残渣がなく現像されることが重要である。このような観点からは、光重合開始剤としてはオキシム化合物を使用することが特に好ましい。特に、固体撮像素子において微細なパターンを形成する場合、硬化用露光にステッパー露光を用いるが、この露光機はハロゲンにより損傷される場合があり、光重合開始剤の添加量も低く抑える必要があるため、これらの点を考慮すれば、固体撮像素子の如き微細パターンを形成するには(D)光重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物を用いるのが最も好ましい。
A commercially available product can be used as the trihalomethyltriazine compound, for example, TAZ-107 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
In particular, when the composition of the present invention is used for the production of a color filter included in a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It is important that it be developed. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed in a solid-state imaging device, stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, in view of these points, it is most preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator (D) in order to form a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
 前記トリアジン骨格を有するハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体としては、例えば、若林ら著、Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan,42、2924(1969)記載の化合物、英国特許第1388492号明細書記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報記載の化合物、独国特許第3337024号明細書記載の化合物、F.C.SchaeferなどによるJ.Org.Chem.;29、1527(1964)記載の化合物、特開昭62-58241号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-281728号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-34920号公報記載化合物、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されている化合物、などが挙げられる。 Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon derivative having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3333724, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compound described in JP-A-62-258241, compound described in JP-A-5-281728, compound described in JP-A-5-34920, US Pat. No. 4,221,976 And the compounds described in the book.
 前記米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されている化合物としては、例えば、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物(例えば、2-トリクロロメチル-5-フェニル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-クロロフェニル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(1-ナフチル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(2-ナフチル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリブロモメチル-5-フェニル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリブロモメチル-5-(2-ナフチル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール;2-トリクロロメチル-5-スチリル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-クロロスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-メトキシスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-n-ブトキシスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリプロモメチル-5-スチリル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾールなど)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound described in US Pat. No. 4,221,976 include compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton (for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- Trichloromethyl-5- (4-chlorophenyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (1-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5 -(2-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5- (2-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole; 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-chlorostyryl) ) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-methoxystyryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-n-butoxystyryl) ) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tripromomethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole and the like.
 また、上記以外の光重合開始剤として、アクリジン誘導体(例えば、9-フェニルアクリジン、1,7-ビス(9,9’-アクリジニル)ヘプタンなど)、N-フェニルグリシンなど、ポリハロゲン化合物(例えば、四臭化炭素、フェニルトリブロモメチルスルホン、フェニルトリクロロメチルケトンなど)、クマリン類(例えば、3-(2-ベンゾフラノイル)-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-(2-ベンゾフロイル)-7-(1-ピロリジニル)クマリン、3-ベンゾイル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-(2-メトキシベンゾイル)-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-(4-ジメチルアミノベンゾイル)-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3,3’-カルボニルビス(5,7-ジ-n-プロポキシクマリン)、3,3’-カルボニルビス(7-ジエチルアミノクマリン)、3-ベンゾイル-7-メトキシクマリン、3-(2-フロイル)-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-(4-ジエチルアミノシンナモイル)-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、7-メトキシ-3-(3-ピリジルカルボニル)クマリン、3-ベンゾイル-5,7-ジプロポキシクマリン、7-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イルクマリン、また、特開平5-19475号公報、特開平7-271028号公報、特開2002-363206号公報、特開2002-363207号公報、特開2002-363208号公報、特開2002-363209号公報などに記載のクマリン化合物など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド類(例えば、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルホスフィンオキサイド、ビス(2,6-ジメトキシベンゾイル)-2,4,4-トリメチル-ペンチルフェニルホスフィンオキサイド、LucirinTPOなど)、メタロセン類(例えば、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)-ビス(2,6-ジフロロ-3-(1H-ピロール-1-イル)-フェニル)チタニウム、η5-シクロペンタジエニル-η6-クメニル-アイアン(1+)-ヘキサフロロホスフェート(1-)など)、特開昭53-133428号公報、特公昭57-1819号公報、同57-6096号公報、および米国特許第3615455号明細書に記載された化合物などが挙げられる。 Further, as photopolymerization initiators other than those mentioned above, polyhalogen compounds (for example, 9-phenylacridine, 1,7-bis (9,9′-acridinyl) heptane, etc.), N-phenylglycine, etc. Carbon tetrabromide, phenyl tribromomethyl sulfone, phenyl trichloromethyl ketone, etc.), coumarins (eg, 3- (2-benzofuranoyl) -7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3- (2-benzofuroyl) -7- (1 -Pyrrolidinyl) coumarin, 3-benzoyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3- (2-methoxybenzoyl) -7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3- (4-dimethylaminobenzoyl) -7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3,3'-carbonylbis (5,7-di-n-propoxycoumarin), 3,3'-ca Bonylbis (7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3-benzoyl-7-methoxycoumarin, 3- (2-furoyl) -7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3- (4-diethylaminocinnamoyl) -7-diethylaminocoumarin, 7-methoxy-3 -(3-pyridylcarbonyl) coumarin, 3-benzoyl-5,7-dipropoxycoumarin, 7-benzotriazol-2-ylcoumarin, JP-A-5-19475, JP-A-7-271028, JP No. 2002-363206, JP-A No. 2002-363207, JP-A No. 2002-363208, JP-A No. 2002-363209, etc.), acylphosphine oxides (for example, bis (2,4 , 6-Trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphos Zinc oxide, bis (2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl) -2,4,4-trimethyl-pentylphenylphosphine oxide, Lucirin TPO, etc.), metallocenes (for example, bis (η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)- Bis (2,6-difluoro-3- (1H-pyrrol-1-yl) -phenyl) titanium, η5-cyclopentadienyl-η6-cumenyl-iron (1 +)-hexafluorophosphate (1-), etc.) Examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 53-133428, 57-1819, 57-6096, and US Pat. No. 3,615,455.
 前記ケトン化合物としては、例えば、ベンゾフェノン、2-メチルベンゾフェノン、3-メチルベンゾフェノン、4-メチルベンゾフェノン、4-メトキシベンゾフェノン、2-クロロベンゾフェノン、4-クロロベンゾフェノン、4-ブロモベンゾフェノン、2-カルボキシベンゾフェノン、2-エトキシカルボニルベンゾフェノン、ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸またはそのテトラメチルエステル、4,4’-ビス(ジアルキルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン類(例えば、4,4’-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ビスジシクロヘキシルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ビス(ジヒドロキシエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4-メトキシ-4’-ジメチルアミノベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ジメトキシベンゾフェノン、4-ジメチルアミノベンゾフェノン、4-ジメチルアミノアセトフェノン、ベンジル、アントラキノン、2-tert-ブチルアントラキノン、2-メチルアントラキノン、フェナントラキノン、キサントン、チオキサントン、2-クロロ-チオキサントン、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン、フルオレノン、2-ベンジル-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)-1-ブタノン、2-メチル-1-〔4-(メチルチオ)フェニル〕-2-モルホリノ-1-プロパノン、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-〔4-(1-メチルビニル)フェニル〕プロパノールオリゴマー、ベンゾイン、ベンゾインエーテル類(例えば、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、ベンゾインエチルエーテル、ベンゾインプロピルエーテル、ベンゾインイソプロピルエーテル、ベンゾインフェニルエーテル、ベンジルジメチルケタール)、アクリドン、クロロアクリドン、N-メチルアクリドン、N-ブチルアクリドン、N-ブチル-クロロアクリドンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the ketone compound include benzophenone, 2-methylbenzophenone, 3-methylbenzophenone, 4-methylbenzophenone, 4-methoxybenzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4-chlorobenzophenone, 4-bromobenzophenone, 2-carboxybenzophenone, 2-ethoxycarbonylbenzophenone, benzophenonetetracarboxylic acid or tetramethyl ester thereof, 4,4′-bis (dialkylamino) benzophenones (eg, 4,4′-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4′-bisdicyclohexyl) Amino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis (dihydroxyethylamino) benzophenone, 4-methoxy-4'-dimethylamino Benzophenone, 4,4'-dimethoxybenzophenone, 4-dimethylaminobenzophenone, 4-dimethylaminoacetophenone, benzyl, anthraquinone, 2-tert-butylanthraquinone, 2-methylanthraquinone, phenanthraquinone, xanthone, thioxanthone, 2-chloro -Thioxanthone, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, fluorenone, 2-benzyl-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1-butanone, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholino -1-propanone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl- [4- (1-methylvinyl) phenyl] propanol oligomer, benzoin, benzoin ethers (for example, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether) , Benzoin propyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin phenyl ether, benzyl dimethyl ketal), acridone, chloro acridone, N- methyl acridone, N- butyl acridone, N- butyl - such as chloro acrylic pyrrolidone.
 光重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物も好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤も用いることができる。
 ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、IRGACURE-184、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959,IRGACURE-127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、および、IRGACURE-379、IRGACURE-OXE379(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤として、365nmまたは405nm等の長波光源に吸収波長がマッチングされた特開2009-191179公報に記載の化合物も用いることができる。また、アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては市販品であるIRGACURE-819やDAROCUR-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, IRGACURE-379, IRGACURE-OXE379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 whose absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source of 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used. As the acylphosphine initiator, commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
 光重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報記載の化合物を用いることができる。 More preferable examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds. Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
 本発明における光重合開始剤として好適に用いられるオキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物としては、例えば、3-ベンゾイロキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイロキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、および2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds such as oxime derivatives that are preferably used as the photopolymerization initiator in the present invention include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, and 3-propionyloxyimino. Butan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4 -Toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, and the like.
 オキシム化合物としては、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660)、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232、特開2000-66385号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。
 市販品ではIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社製)も好適に用いられる。
Examples of oxime compounds include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995), pp. 156-162. 202-232, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF), and TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.) are also preferably used as commercial products.
 また上記記載以外のオキシム化合物として、カルバゾールN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許第7626957号公報に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報および米国特許公開2009-292039号記載の化合物、国際公開特許2009-131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許7556910号公報に記載の化合物、405nmに吸収極大を有しg線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報記載の化合物、などを用いてもよい。 Further, as oxime compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N-position, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety, Compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189, a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton in the same molecule A compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained therein, a compound described in JP-A-2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-line light source, and the like may be used.
 好ましくはさらに、特開2007-231000号公報、および、特開2007-322744号公報に記載される環状オキシム化合物に対しても好適に用いることができる。環状オキシム化合物の中でも、特に特開2010-32985号公報、特開2010-185072号公報に記載されるカルバゾール色素に縮環した環状オキシム化合物は、高い光吸収性を有し高感度化の観点から好ましい。
 また、オキシム化合物の特定部位に不飽和結合を有する特開2009-242469号公報に記載の化合物も、重合不活性ラジカルから活性ラジカルを再生することで高感度化を達成でき好適に使用することができる。
Preferably, it can also be suitably used for the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744. Among cyclic oxime compounds, in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
Further, the compounds described in JP-A-2009-242469 having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound can be preferably used because high sensitivity can be achieved by regenerating the active radical from the polymerization inert radical. it can.
 最も好ましくは、特開2007-269779号公報に示される特定置換基を有するオキシム化合物や、特開2009-191061号公報に示されるチオアリール基を有するオキシム化合物が挙げられる。
 具体的には、光重合開始剤であるオキシム化合物としては、下記一般式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。なお、オキシムのN-O結合が(E)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(Z)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(E)体と(Z)体との混合物であってもよい。
Most preferably, an oxime compound having a specific substituent as disclosed in JP 2007-26997A and an oxime compound having a thioaryl group as disclosed in JP 2009-191061 A can be given.
Specifically, the oxime compound that is a photopolymerization initiator is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-1). The oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 一般式(OX-1)中、RおよびBは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、Aは二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表す。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Rで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
 前記一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、アリールチオカルボニル基等が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基またはアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、アリール基等が挙げられる。
In general formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
 アルキル基としては、炭素数1~30のアルキル基が好ましく、具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基、ドデシル基、オクタデシル基、イソプロピル基、イソブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、1-エチルペンチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、トリフルオロメチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、フェナシル基、1-ナフトイルメチル基、2-ナフトイルメチル基、4-メチルスルファニルフェナシル基、4-フェニルスルファニルフェナシル基、4-ジメチルアミノフェナシル基、4-シアノフェナシル基、4-メチルフェナシル基、2-メチルフェナシル基、3-フルオロフェナシル基、3-トリフルオロメチルフェナシル基、および、3-ニトロフェナシル基が例示できる。 As the alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable. Specifically, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, an octadecyl group, an isopropyl group , Isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, 1-ethylpentyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, trifluoromethyl, 2-ethylhexyl, phenacyl, 1-naphthoylmethyl, 2-naphthoyl Methyl group, 4-methylsulfanylphenacyl group, 4-phenylsulfanylphenacyl group, 4-dimethylaminophenacyl group, 4-cyanophenacyl group, 4-methylphenacyl group, 2-methylphenacyl group, 3-fluorophena Sil group, 3-trifluoromethylphenacyl group, and 3-nitro Enashiru group can be exemplified.
 アリール基としては、炭素数6~30のアリール基が好ましく、具体的には、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、9-アンスリル基、9-フェナントリル基、1-ピレニル基、5-ナフタセニル基、1-インデニル基、2-アズレニル基、9-フルオレニル基、ターフェニル基、クオーターフェニル基、o-トリル基、m-トリル基、p-トリル基、キシリル基、o-クメニル基、m-クメニル基およびp-クメニル基、メシチル基、ペンタレニル基、ビナフタレニル基、ターナフタレニル基、クオーターナフタレニル基、ヘプタレニル基、ビフェニレニル基、インダセニル基、フルオランテニル基、アセナフチレニル基、アセアントリレニル基、フェナレニル基、フルオレニル基、アントリル基、ビアントラセニル基、ターアントラセニル基、クオーターアントラセニル基、アントラキノリル基、フェナントリル基、トリフェニレニル基、ピレニル基、クリセニル基、ナフタセニル基、プレイアデニル基、ピセニル基、ペリレニル基、ペンタフェニル基、ペンタセニル基、テトラフェニレニル基、ヘキサフェニル基、ヘキサセニル基、ルビセニル基、コロネニル基、トリナフチレニル基、ヘプタフェニル基、ヘプタセニル基、ピラントレニル基、並びに、オバレニル基が例示できる。 The aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and specifically includes a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, a 9-anthryl group, a 9-phenanthryl group, and a 1-pyrenyl group. Group, 5-naphthacenyl group, 1-indenyl group, 2-azurenyl group, 9-fluorenyl group, terphenyl group, quarterphenyl group, o-tolyl group, m-tolyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, o- Cumenyl, m-cumenyl and p-cumenyl, mesityl, pentarenyl, binaphthalenyl, turnanaphthalenyl, quarternaphthalenyl, heptaenyl, biphenylenyl, indacenyl, fluoranthenyl, acenaphthylenyl, aceanthrylyl Nyl group, phenalenyl group, fluorenyl group, anthryl group, biantra Nyl group, teranthracenyl group, quarteranthracenyl group, anthraquinolyl group, phenanthryl group, triphenylenyl group, pyrenyl group, chrysenyl group, naphthacenyl group, preadenyl group, picenyl group, perylenyl group, pentaphenyl group, pentacenyl group, Examples thereof include a tetraphenylenyl group, a hexaphenyl group, a hexacenyl group, a ruvicenyl group, a coronenyl group, a trinaphthylenyl group, a heptaphenyl group, a heptacenyl group, a pyranthrenyl group, and an ovalenyl group.
 アシル基としては、炭素数2~20のアシル基が好ましく、具体的には、アセチル基、プロパノイル基、ブタノイル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ペンタノイル基、ベンゾイル基、1-ナフトイル基、2-ナフトイル基、4-メチルスルファニルベンゾイル基、4-フェニルスルファニルベンゾイル基、4-ジメチルアミノベンゾイル基、4-ジエチルアミノベンゾイル基、2-クロロベンゾイル基、2-メチルベンゾイル基、2-メトキシベンゾイル基、2-ブトキシベンゾイル基、3-クロロベンゾイル基、3-トリフルオロメチルベンゾイル基、3-シアノベンゾイル基、3-ニトロベンゾイル基、4-フルオロベンゾイル基、4-シアノベンゾイル基、および、4-メトキシベンゾイル基が例示できる。 The acyl group is preferably an acyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically includes an acetyl group, a propanoyl group, a butanoyl group, a trifluoroacetyl group, a pentanoyl group, a benzoyl group, a 1-naphthoyl group, and a 2-naphthoyl group. 4-methylsulfanylbenzoyl group, 4-phenylsulfanylbenzoyl group, 4-dimethylaminobenzoyl group, 4-diethylaminobenzoyl group, 2-chlorobenzoyl group, 2-methylbenzoyl group, 2-methoxybenzoyl group, 2-butoxybenzoyl Group, 3-chlorobenzoyl group, 3-trifluoromethylbenzoyl group, 3-cyanobenzoyl group, 3-nitrobenzoyl group, 4-fluorobenzoyl group, 4-cyanobenzoyl group, and 4-methoxybenzoyl group can be exemplified. .
 アルコキシカルボニル基としては、炭素数2~20のアルコキシカルボニル基が好ましく、具体的には、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、プロポキシカルボニル基、ブトキシカルボニル基、ヘキシルオキシカルボニル基、オクチルオキシカルボニル基、デシルオキシカルボニル基、オクタデシルオキシカルボニル基、および、トリフルオロメチルオキシカルボニル基が例示できる。 The alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically includes a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, a propoxycarbonyl group, a butoxycarbonyl group, a hexyloxycarbonyl group, an octyloxycarbonyl group, a decyl group. Examples thereof include an oxycarbonyl group, an octadecyloxycarbonyl group, and a trifluoromethyloxycarbonyl group.
 アリールオキシカルボニル基として具体的には、フェノキシカルボニル基、1-ナフチルオキシカルボニル基、2-ナフチルオキシカルボニル基、4-メチルスルファニルフェニルオキシカルボニル基、4-フェニルスルファニルフェニルオキシカルボニル基、4-ジメチルアミノフェニルオキシカルボニル基、4-ジエチルアミノフェニルオキシカルボニル基、2-クロロフェニルオキシカルボニル基、2-メチルフェニルオキシカルボニル基、2-メトキシフェニルオキシカルボニル基、2-ブトキシフェニルオキシカルボニル基、3-クロロフェニルオキシカルボニル基、3-トリフルオロメチルフェニルオキシカルボニル基、3-シアノフェニルオキシカルボニル基、3-ニトロフェニルオキシカルボニル基、4-フルオロフェニルオキシカルボニル基、4-シアノフェニルオキシカルボニル基、および、4-メトキシフェニルオキシカルボニル基が例示できる。 Specific examples of the aryloxycarbonyl group include phenoxycarbonyl group, 1-naphthyloxycarbonyl group, 2-naphthyloxycarbonyl group, 4-methylsulfanylphenyloxycarbonyl group, 4-phenylsulfanylphenyloxycarbonyl group, 4-dimethylamino. Phenyloxycarbonyl group, 4-diethylaminophenyloxycarbonyl group, 2-chlorophenyloxycarbonyl group, 2-methylphenyloxycarbonyl group, 2-methoxyphenyloxycarbonyl group, 2-butoxyphenyloxycarbonyl group, 3-chlorophenyloxycarbonyl group 3-trifluoromethylphenyloxycarbonyl group, 3-cyanophenyloxycarbonyl group, 3-nitrophenyloxycarbonyl group, 4-fluoropheny Oxycarbonyl group, 4-cyanophenyl oxycarbonyl group, and, 4-methoxy phenyloxy carbonyl group can be exemplified.
 複素環基としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子若しくはリン原子を含む、芳香族または脂肪族の複素環が好ましい。
 具体的には、チエニル基、ベンゾ[b]チエニル基、ナフト[2,3-b]チエニル基、チアントレニル基、フリル基、ピラニル基、イソベンゾフラニル基、クロメニル基、キサンテニル基、フェノキサチイニル基、2H-ピロリル基、ピロリル基、イミダゾリル基、ピラゾリル基、ピリジル基、ピラジニル基、ピリミジニル基、ピリダジニル基、インドリジニル基、イソインドリル基、3H-インドリル基、インドリル基、1H-インダゾリル基、プリニル基、4H-キノリジニル基、イソキノリル基、キノリル基、フタラジニル基、ナフチリジニル基、キノキサリニル基、キナゾリニル基、シンノリニル基、プテリジニル基、4aH-カルバゾリル基、カルバゾリル基、β-カルボリニル基、フェナントリジニル基、アクリジニル基、ペリミジニル基、フェナントロリニル基、フェナジニル基、フェナルサジニル基、イソチアゾリル基、フェノチアジニル基、イソキサゾリル基、フラザニル基、フェノキサジニル基、イソクロマニル基、クロマニル基、ピロリジニル基、ピロリニル基、イミダゾリジニル基、イミダゾリニル基、ピラゾリジニル基、ピラゾリニル基、ピペリジル基、ピペラジニル基、インドリニル基、イソインドリニル基、キヌクリジニル基、モルホリニル基、および、チオキサントリル基が例示できる。
As the heterocyclic group, an aromatic or aliphatic heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a phosphorus atom is preferable.
Specifically, thienyl group, benzo [b] thienyl group, naphtho [2,3-b] thienyl group, thiantenyl group, furyl group, pyranyl group, isobenzofuranyl group, chromenyl group, xanthenyl group, phenoxathiyl Nyl group, 2H-pyrrolyl group, pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, pyridyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, pyridazinyl group, indolizinyl group, isoindolyl group, 3H-indolyl group, indolyl group, 1H-indazolyl group, purinyl group 4H-quinolidinyl group, isoquinolyl group, quinolyl group, phthalazinyl group, naphthyridinyl group, quinoxalinyl group, quinazolinyl group, cinnolinyl group, pteridinyl group, 4aH-carbazolyl group, carbazolyl group, β-carbolinyl group, phenanthridinyl group, acridinyl group Group Midinyl group, phenanthrolinyl group, phenazinyl group, phenalsadinyl group, isothiazolyl group, phenothiazinyl group, isoxazolyl group, furazanyl group, phenoxazinyl group, isochromanyl group, chromanyl group, pyrrolidinyl group, pyrrolinyl group, imidazolidinyl group, imidazolinyl group, pyrazolidinyl group, pyrazolidinyl group Examples include a group, pyrazolinyl group, piperidyl group, piperazinyl group, indolinyl group, isoindolinyl group, quinuclidinyl group, morpholinyl group, and thioxanthryl group.
 アルキルチオカルボニル基として具体的には、メチルチオカルボニル基、プロピルチオカルボニル基、ブチルチオカルボニル基、ヘキシルチオカルボニル基、オクチルチオカルボニル基、デシルチオカルボニル基、オクタデシルチオカルボニル基、および、トリフルオロメチルチオカルボニル基が例示できる。 Specific examples of the alkylthiocarbonyl group include a methylthiocarbonyl group, a propylthiocarbonyl group, a butylthiocarbonyl group, a hexylthiocarbonyl group, an octylthiocarbonyl group, a decylthiocarbonyl group, an octadecylthiocarbonyl group, and a trifluoromethylthiocarbonyl group. Can be illustrated.
 アリールチオカルボニル基として具体的には、1-ナフチルチオカルボニル基、2-ナフチルチオカルボニル基、4-メチルスルファニルフェニルチオカルボニル基、4-フェニルスルファニルフェニルチオカルボニル基、4-ジメチルアミノフェニルチオカルボニル基、4-ジエチルアミノフェニルチオカルボニル基、2-クロロフェニルチオカルボニル基、2-メチルフェニルチオカルボニル基、2-メトキシフェニルチオカルボニル基、2-ブトキシフェニルチオカルボニル基、3-クロロフェニルチオカルボニル基、3-トリフルオロメチルフェニルチオカルボニル基、3-シアノフェニルチオカルボニル基、3-ニトロフェニルチオカルボニル基、4-フルオロフェニルチオカルボニル基、4-シアノフェニルチオカルボニル基、および、4-メトキシフェニルチオカルボニル基が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the arylthiocarbonyl group include a 1-naphthylthiocarbonyl group, a 2-naphthylthiocarbonyl group, a 4-methylsulfanylphenylthiocarbonyl group, a 4-phenylsulfanylphenylthiocarbonyl group, and a 4-dimethylaminophenylthiocarbonyl group. 4-diethylaminophenylthiocarbonyl group, 2-chlorophenylthiocarbonyl group, 2-methylphenylthiocarbonyl group, 2-methoxyphenylthiocarbonyl group, 2-butoxyphenylthiocarbonyl group, 3-chlorophenylthiocarbonyl group, 3-triphenyl Fluoromethylphenylthiocarbonyl group, 3-cyanophenylthiocarbonyl group, 3-nitrophenylthiocarbonyl group, 4-fluorophenylthiocarbonyl group, 4-cyanophenylthiocarbonyl group And, and a 4-methoxyphenylthiocarbonyl group.
 一般式(OX-1)中、Bで表される一価の置換基としては、アリール基、複素環基、アリールカルボニル基、または、複素環カルボニル基を表す。また、これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。 In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by B represents an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
 なかでも、特に好ましくは以下に示す構造である。
 下記の構造中、Y、X、および、nは、それぞれ、後述する一般式(OX-2)におけるY、X、および、nと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。
Of these, the structures shown below are particularly preferred.
In the following structure, Y, X, and n have the same meanings as Y, X, and n in General Formula (OX-2) described later, and preferred examples are also the same.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 前記式(OX-1)中、Aで表される二価の有機基としては、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルキニレン基が挙げられる。また、これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 中でも、式(OX-1)におけるAとしては、感度を高め、加熱経時による着色を抑制する点から、無置換のアルキレン基、アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、tert-ブチル基、ドデシル基)で置換されたアルキレン基、アルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、アリル基)で置換されたアルキレン基、アリール基(例えば、フェニル基、p-トリル基、キシリル基、クメニル基、ナフチル基、アンスリル基、フェナントリル基、スチリル基)で置換されたアルキレン基が好ましい。
In the formula (OX-1), examples of the divalent organic group represented by A include an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, and an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Among them, A in the formula (OX-1) is an unsubstituted alkylene group, an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a tert-butyl group, dodecyl) from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloring due to heating. Group) substituted alkylene group, alkenyl group (eg vinyl group, allyl group) alkylene group, aryl group (eg phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl) Group, a phenanthryl group, and a styryl group) are preferable.
 前記式(OX-1)中、Arで表されるアリール基としては、炭素数6~30のアリール基が好ましく、また、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、先に置換基を有していてもよいアリール基の具体例として挙げた置換アリール基に導入された置換基と同様のものが例示できる。
 なかでも、感度を高め、加熱経時による着色を抑制する点から、置換または無置換のフェニル基が好ましい。
In the formula (OX-1), the aryl group represented by Ar is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those introduced into the substituted aryl group mentioned above as specific examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent.
Of these, a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloring due to heating.
 式(OX-1)においては、前記式(OX-1)中のArとそれに隣接するSとで形成される「SAr」の構造が、以下に示す構造であることが感度の点で好ましい。なお、Meはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表す。 In the formula (OX-1), it is preferable in terms of sensitivity that the structure of “SAr” formed by Ar in the formula (OX-1) and S adjacent thereto is a structure shown below. Me represents a methyl group, and Et represents an ethyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 オキシム化合物は、下記一般式(OX-2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 一般式(OX-2)中、RおよびXは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、AおよびYは各々独立に二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表し、nは0~5の整数である。一般式(OX-2)におけるR、A、およびArは、一般式(OX-1)におけるR、A、およびArと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。 In general formula (OX-2), R and X each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A and Y each independently represent a divalent organic group, Ar represents an aryl group, and n represents 0 to It is an integer of 5. R, A and Ar in the general formula (OX-2) have the same meanings as R, A and Ar in the general formula (OX-1), and preferred examples thereof are also the same.
 一般式(OX-2)中、Xで表される一価の置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アミノ基、複素環基、ハロゲン原子が挙げられる。また、これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。 In the general formula (OX-2), the monovalent substituent represented by X includes an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amino group, and a heterocyclic ring. Group and halogen atom. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
 これらの中でも、一般式(OX-2)におけるXとしては、溶剤溶解性と長波長領域の吸収効率向上の点から、アルキル基が好ましい。
 また、式(OX-2)におけるnは、0~5の整数を表し、0~2の整数が好ましい。
Among these, X in the general formula (OX-2) is preferably an alkyl group from the viewpoint of solvent solubility and improvement of absorption efficiency in the long wavelength region.
In the formula (OX-2), n represents an integer of 0 to 5, and an integer of 0 to 2 is preferable.
 一般式(OX-2)中、Yで表される二価の有機基としては、以下に示す構造が挙げられる。なお、以下に示される基において、「*」は、前記式(OX-2)において、Yと隣接する炭素原子との結合位置を示す。 In the general formula (OX-2), examples of the divalent organic group represented by Y include the following structures. In the groups shown below, “*” represents a bonding position between Y and an adjacent carbon atom in the formula (OX-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 中でも、高感度化の観点から、下記に示す構造が好ましい。 Of these, the following structures are preferable from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 さらにオキシム化合物は、下記一般式(OX-3)または(OX-4)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 Furthermore, the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-3) or (OX-4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 一般式(OX-3)または(OX-4)中、RおよびXは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、Aは二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表し、nは0~5の整数である。)
 一般式(OX-3)または(OX-4)におけるR、X、A、Ar、および、nは、前記一般式(OX-2)におけるR、X、A、Ar、および、nとそれぞれ同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。
In general formula (OX-3) or (OX-4), R and X each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, Ar represents an aryl group, and n represents 0 An integer of ~ 5. )
R, X, A, Ar, and n in the general formula (OX-3) or (OX-4) have the same meanings as R, X, A, Ar, and n in the general formula (OX-2), respectively. The preferred examples are also the same.
 以下好適に用いられるオキシム化合物の具体例(C-4)~(C-13)を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples (C-4) to (C-13) of oxime compounds that can be suitably used are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 オキシム化合物は、350nm~500nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものであり、360nm~480nmの波長領域に吸収波長を有するものであることが好ましく、365nmおよび455nmの吸光度が高いものが特に好ましい。 The oxime compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, preferably has an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 455 nm.
 オキシム化合物の365nmまたは405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、1,000~300,000であることが好ましく、2,000~300,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが特に好ましい。
 化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができるが、具体的には、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Carry-5 spctrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。
The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of sensitivity. 000 is particularly preferred.
The molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured by using a known method. Specifically, for example, in an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Inc., Cary-5 spcphotometer), an ethyl acetate solvent is used. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g / L.
 本発明に用いられる光重合開始剤は、必要に応じて、2種以上を組み合わせて使用しても良い。 The photopolymerization initiator used in the present invention may be used in combination of two or more as required.
 本発明の組成物における(D)光重合開始剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し0.1質量%以上10質量%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.5質量%以上5質量%以下、さらに好ましくは1質量%以上3質量%以下である。この範囲で、より良好な感度とパターン形成性が得られる。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator (D) in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. It is 5 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 1 mass% or more and 3 mass% or less. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
<<(E)重合性化合物>>
 本発明の組成物は、(E)重合性化合物を含有する。本発明では、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の重合性化合物を用いることができ、例えば、エチレン性不飽和結合、環状エーテル(エポキシ、オキセタン)、メチロール等を含む重合性化合物が挙げられる。(E)重合性化合物は、感度の観点から、末端エチレン性不飽和結合を少なくとも1個、好ましくは2個以上有する化合物から好適に選ばれる。中でも、4官能以上の多官能重合性化合物が好ましく、5官能以上の多官能重合性化合物がさらに好ましい。
<< (E) polymerizable compound >>
The composition of the present invention contains (E) a polymerizable compound. In the present invention, known polymerizable compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used, and examples thereof include polymerizable compounds containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane), methylol and the like. . (E) The polymerizable compound is preferably selected from compounds having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Among them, a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 4 or more functional groups is preferable, and a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 5 or more functional groups is more preferable.
 このような化合物群は当該産業分野において広く知られているものであり、本発明においてはこれらを特に限定なく用いることができる。これらは、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、すなわち2量体、3量体およびオリゴマーまたはそれらの混合物並びにそれらのオリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。本発明における重合性化合物は一種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 Such compound groups are widely known in the industrial field, and these can be used without particular limitation in the present invention. These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, ie dimers, trimers and oligomers or mixtures thereof and oligomers thereof. The polymeric compound in this invention may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 より具体的には、モノマーおよびそのプレポリマーの例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類、並びにこれらの多量体が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、および不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アミン化合物とのアミド類、並びにこれらの多量体である。また、ヒドロキシル基やアミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類或いはエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、さらに、ハロゲン基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。
 これらの具体的な化合物としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号〔0095〕~〔0108〕に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
More specifically, examples of monomers and prepolymers thereof include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters thereof, amides, And multimers thereof, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and multimers thereof. is there. Also, addition reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as hydroxyl group, amino group, mercapto group, monofunctional or polyfunctional. A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. In addition, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. As another example, it is also possible to use a compound group in which an unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether or the like is used instead of the unsaturated carboxylic acid.
As these specific compounds, compounds described in paragraphs [0095] to [0108] of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
 また、前記重合性化合物としては、少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン基を有する、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物も好ましい。その例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の単官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレート;ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、グリセリンやトリメチロールエタン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの、特公昭48-41708号公報、特公昭50-6034号公報、特開昭51-37193号公報に記載されているようなウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類、特開昭48-64183号公報、特公昭49-43191号公報、特公昭52-30490号公報に記載されているポリエステルアクリレート類、エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸との反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレートおよびこれらの混合物を挙げることができる。
 多官能カルボン酸にグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等の環状エーテル基とエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物を反応させ得られる多官能(メタ)アクリレートなども挙げることができる。
 また、その他の好ましい前記重合性化合物として、特開2010-160418号公報、特開2010-129825号公報、特許第4364216号明細書等に記載される、フルオレン環を有し、エチレン性不飽和基を2官能以上有する化合物、カルド樹脂も使用することが可能である。
The polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group and having an ethylenically unsaturated group having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure. Examples include monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri ( (Meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol ( (Meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) iso Polyfunctional alcohols such as nurate, glycerin and trimethylolethane added with ethylene oxide or propylene oxide and then (meth) acrylated, Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708, Japanese Patent Publication No. 50-6034, JP Urethane (meth) acrylates as described in JP-A-51-37193, polyester acrylates described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191, JP-B-52-30490 And polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and mixtures thereof.
A polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyfunctional carboxylic acid with a compound having a cyclic ether group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated group can also be used.
Other preferable polymerizable compounds include fluorene rings described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, Japanese Patent No. 4364216, etc., and ethylenically unsaturated groups. It is also possible to use a compound having two or more functional groups, a cardo resin.
 また、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を有し、少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物としては、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号[0254]~[0257]に記載の化合物も好適である。 As compounds having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure and having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group, paragraphs [0254] to [0257] of JP-A-2008-292970 are disclosed. Also suitable are the compounds described in.
 上記のほか、下記一般式(MO-1)~(MO-5)で表される、ラジカル重合性モノマーも好適に用いることができる。なお、式中、Tがオキシアルキレン基の場合には、炭素原子側の末端がRに結合する。 In addition to the above, radically polymerizable monomers represented by the following general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) can also be suitably used. In the formula, when T is an oxyalkylene group, the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 前記一般式(MO-1)~(MO-5)中、nは0~14であり、mは1~8である。一分子内に複数存在するR、T、は、各々同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 前記一般式(MO-1)~(MO-5)で表される重合性化合物の各々において、複数存在するRの少なくとも1つは、-OC(=O)CH=CH、または、-OC(=O)
C(CH)=CHで表される基を表す。
 前記一般式(MO-1)~(MO-5)で表される重合性化合物の具体例としては、特開2007-269779号公報の段落番号0248~段落番号0251に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
In the general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), n is 0 to 14 and m is 1 to 8. A plurality of R and T present in one molecule may be the same or different.
In each of the polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), at least one of a plurality of R's is —OC (═O) CH═CH 2 or —OC (= O)
A group represented by C (CH 3 ) ═CH 2 is represented.
Specific examples of the polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) include compounds described in paragraphs 0248 to 0251 of JP-A-2007-2699779. It can be suitably used in the invention.
 また、特開平10-62986号公報において一般式(1)および(2)としてその具体例と共に記載の前記多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後に(メタ)アクリレート化した化合物も、前記重合性化合物として用いることができる。 Further, compounds obtained by adding (meth) acrylate after adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to the polyfunctional alcohol described in JP-A-10-62986 as general formulas (1) and (2) together with specific examples thereof are also provided. It can be used as the polymerizable compound.
 中でも、前記重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬株式会社製、A-DPH-12E;新中村化学社製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。以下に好ましい重合性化合物の態様を示す。 Among these, as the polymerizable compound, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; Nippon Kayaku) Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available) KAYARAD D-310 (commercially available product), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) A structure manufactured by A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and these (meth) acryloyl groups via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred. These oligomer types can also be used. Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable compound are shown below.
 前記重合性化合物としては、多官能モノマーであって、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。エチレン性化合物が、上記のように混合物である場合のように未反応のカルボキシル基を有するものであれば、これをそのまま利用することができるが、必要において、上述のエチレン性化合物のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を導入してもよい。この場合、使用される非芳香族カルボン酸無水物の具体例としては、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸が挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound is a polyfunctional monomer and may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. If the ethylenic compound has an unreacted carboxyl group as in the case of a mixture as described above, this can be used as it is. Non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides may be reacted to introduce acid groups. In this case, specific examples of the non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride used include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
 本発明において、酸基を有するモノマーとしては、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルであり、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせた多官能モノマーが好ましく、
 特に好ましくは、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトールおよび/またはジペンタエリスリトールであるものである。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成株式会社製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、M-510、M-520などが挙げられる。
In the present invention, the monomer having an acid group is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. A polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is preferred,
Particularly preferably, in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include M-510 and M-520 as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
 これらのモノマーは1種を単独で用いてもよいが、製造上、単一の化合物を用いることは難しいことから、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。また、必要に応じてモノマーとして酸基を有しない多官能モノマーと酸基を有する多官能モノマーを併用してもよい。
 酸基を有する多官能モノマーの好ましい酸価としては、0.1mgKOH/g~40mgKOH/gであり、特に好ましくは5mgKOH/g~30mgKOH/gである。多官能モノマーの酸価が低すぎると現像溶解特性が落ち、高すぎると製造や取扱いが困難になり光重合性能が落ち、画素の表面平滑性等の硬化性が劣るものとなる。従って、異なる酸基の多官能モノマーを2種以上併用する場合、或いは酸基を有しない多官能モノマーを併用する場合、全体の多官能モノマーとしての酸基が上記範囲に入るように調整することが好ましい。
These monomers may be used alone, but since it is difficult to use a single compound in production, two or more kinds may be mixed and used. Moreover, you may use together the polyfunctional monomer which does not have an acid group as a monomer, and the polyfunctional monomer which has an acid group as needed.
A preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1 mgKOH / g to 40 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 mgKOH / g to 30 mgKOH / g. If the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is too low, the developing dissolution properties are lowered, and if it is too high, the production and handling are difficult, the photopolymerization performance is lowered, and the curability such as the surface smoothness of the pixel is deteriorated. Accordingly, when two or more polyfunctional monomers having different acid groups are used in combination, or when a polyfunctional monomer having no acid group is used in combination, the acid groups as the entire polyfunctional monomer should be adjusted so as to fall within the above range. Is preferred.
 また、重合性モノマーとして、カプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体を含有することも好ましい態様である。
 カプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体としては、その分子内にカプロラクトン構造を有する限り特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、(メタ)アクリル酸およびε-カプロラクトンをエステル化することにより得られる、ε-カプロラクトン変性多官能(メタ)アクリレートを挙げることができる。なかでも下記一般式(Z-1)で表されるカプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体が好ましい。
Moreover, it is also a preferable aspect to contain a polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure as the polymerizable monomer.
The polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule. For example, trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, penta Ε-caprolactone modified polyfunctionality obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohol such as erythritol, dipentaerythritol, tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine, (meth) acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone Mention may be made of (meth) acrylates. Among these, a polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure represented by the following general formula (Z-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 一般式(Z-1)中、6個のRは全てが下記一般式(Z-2)で表される基であるか、または6個のRのうち1~5個が下記一般式(Z-2)で表される基であり、残余が下記一般式(Z-3)で表される基である。 In the general formula (Z-1), all six R are groups represented by the following general formula (Z-2), or 1 to 5 of the six R are represented by the following general formula (Z -2), and the remainder is a group represented by the following general formula (Z-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 一般式(Z-2)中、Rは水素原子またはメチル基を示し、mは1または2の数を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。 In general formula (Z-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents a number of 1 or 2, and “*” represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 一般式(Z-3)中、Rは水素原子またはメチル基を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。) In general formula (Z-3), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond. )
 このようなカプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(Z-1)~(Z-3)においてm=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=2、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=3、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)等を挙げることができる。
 本発明において、カプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体は、単独でまたは2種以上を混合して使用することができる。
Such polyfunctional monomers having a caprolactone structure are commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3) above) M = 1, the number of groups represented by the formula (Z-2) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms, DPCA-30 (same formula, m = 1, formula (Z-2) Number of groups represented = 3, compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, R 1 is A compound in which all are hydrogen atoms), DPCA-120 (a compound in which m = 2 in the formula, the number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, and R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), and the like. it can.
In this invention, the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone structure can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
 また、本発明で用いることができる重合性モノマーとしては、下記一般式(Z-4)または(Z-5)で表される化合物の群から選択される少なくとも1種であることも好ましい。 Also, the polymerizable monomer that can be used in the present invention is preferably at least one selected from the group of compounds represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 前記一般式(Z-4)および(Z-5)中、Eは、各々独立に、-((CH)yCHO)-、または-((CH)yCH(CH)O)-を表し、yは、各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、Xは、各々独立に、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、水素原子、またはカルボキシル基を表す。
 前記一般式(Z-4)中、アクリロイル基およびメタクリロイル基の合計は3個または4個であり、mは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。但し、各mの合計が0の場合、Xのうちいずれか1つはカルボキシル基である。
 前記一般式(Z-5)中、アクリロイル基およびメタクリロイル基の合計は5個または6個であり、nは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。但し、各nの合計が0の場合、Xのうちいずれか1つはカルボキシル基である。
In the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) —. Each represents independently an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
In the general formula (Z-4), the total of the acryloyl group and the methacryloyl group is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. is there. However, when the total of each m is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
In the general formula (Z-5), the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the sum of each n is an integer of 0 to 60. is there. However, when the total of each n is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
 前記一般式(Z-4)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が特に好ましい。
 前記一般式(Z-5)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が特に好ましい。
 また、一般式(Z-4)または一般式(Z-5)中の-((CH)yCHO)-または-((CH)yCH(CH)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In the general formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In the general formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
In addition, — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) — in the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) is an oxygen atom side. A form in which the terminal of X is bonded to X is preferred.
 前記一般式(Z-4)または一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。特に、一般式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である形態が好ましい。 The compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In particular, in the general formula (Z-5), a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
 また、一般式(Z-4)または一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物の重合性化合物中における全含有量としては、20質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。 The total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
 前記一般式(Z-4)または一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物は、従来公知の工程である、ペンタエリスリト-ルまたはジペンタエリスリト-ルにエチレンオキシドまたはプロピレンオキシドを開環付加反応により開環骨格を結合する工程と、開環骨格の末端水酸基に、例えば(メタ)アクリロイルクロライドを反応させて(メタ)アクリロイル基を導入する工程と、から合成することができる。各工程は良く知られた工程であり、当業者は容易に一般式(i)または(ii)で表される化合物を合成することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, in which ethylene oxide or propylene oxide is opened to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by an addition reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii).
 前記一般式(Z-4)または一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体および/またはジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
 具体的には、下記式(a)~(f)で表される化合物(以下、「例示化合物(a)~(f)」ともいう。)が挙げられ、中でも、例示化合物(a)、(b)、(e)、(f)が好ましい。
Among the compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5), pentaerythritol derivatives and / or dipentaerythritol derivatives are more preferable.
Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”). Among them, exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 一般式(Z-4)、(Z-5)で表される重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬株式会社製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
 また、重合性化合物としては、特公昭48-41708号公報、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、特公昭62-39418号公報記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。さらに、重合性化合物として、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平1-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性化合物類を用いることによって、非常に感光スピードに優れた硬化性組成物を得ることができる。
 重合性化合物の市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(山陽国策パルプ社製)、UA-7200」(新中村化学社製、DPHA-40H(日本化薬社製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(共栄社製)、トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート(市販品としてはA-TMPT;新中村化学社製)、などが挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765. Also suitable are urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton as described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418. Furthermore, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are described as polymerizable compounds. By using the compounds, it is possible to obtain a curable composition having an extremely excellent photosensitive speed.
Commercially available polymerizable compounds include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 "(manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA- 306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha), trimethylolpropane triacrylate (commercially available products are A-TMPT; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc. It is done.
 環状エーテル(エポキシ、オキセタン)としては、例えば、エポキシ基を有するものとしては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂として、JER-827、JER-828、JER-834、JER-1001、JER-1002、JER-1003、JER-1055、JER-1007、JER-1009、JER-1010(以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)、EPICLON860、EPICLON1050、EPICLON1051、EPICLON1055(以上、DIC(株)製)等であり、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂として、JER-806、JER-807、JER-4004、JER-4005、JER-4007、JER-4010(以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)、EPICLON830、EPICLON835(以上、DIC(株)製)、LCE-21、RE-602S(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等であり、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、JER-152、JER-154、JER-157S70、JER-157S65、(以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-770、EPICLON N-775(以上、DIC(株)製)等であり、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON N-660、EPICLON N-665、EPICLON N-670、EPICLON N-673、EPICLON N-680、EPICLON N-690、EPICLON N-695(以上、DIC(株)製)、EOCN-1020(以上、日本化薬(株)製)、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S、同EP-4085S、同EP-4088S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE-3150(2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物)、EPOLEAD PB 3600、同PB 4700(以上、ダイセル化学工業(株)製)、デナコール EX-211L、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、JER-1031S(ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)等が挙げられる。このような重合性化合物は、ドライエッチング法でパターンを形成する場合に好適である。 Examples of the cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane) include those having an epoxy group such as bisphenol A type epoxy resin, JER-827, JER-828, JER-834, JER-1001, JER-1002, JER-1003. , JER-1055, JER-1007, JER-1009, JER-1010 (manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON 860, EPICLON 1050, EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc., and bisphenol F As type epoxy resins, JER-806, JER-807, JER-4004, JER-4005, JER-4007, JER-4010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resins Co., Ltd.), EPICLON83 EPICLON 835 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (above, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), etc., and phenol novolac type epoxy resins such as JER-152, JER-154, JER -157S70, JER-157S65 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc., and cresol novolac type epoxy As resins, EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), EOCN-10 0 (above, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA) Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE-3150 (1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxiranyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol), EPOLEEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (above) , Manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Denacol EX-212L, EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation), ADEKA RESIN EP- 4000S, EP -4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, (stock) ADEKA), JER-1031S (Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.) and the like. Such a polymerizable compound is suitable for forming a pattern by a dry etching method.
 これらの重合性化合物について、その構造、単独使用か併用か、添加量等の使用方法の詳細は、着色感光性樹脂組成物の最終的な性能設計にあわせて任意に設定できる。例えば、感度の観点では、1分子あたりの不飽和基含量が多い構造が好ましく、多くの場合は2官能以上が好ましい。また、着色感光性樹脂組成物により形成された硬化膜の強度を高める観点では、3官能以上のものがよく、さらに、異なる官能基数・異なる重合性基(例えばアクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル、スチレン系化合物、ビニルエーテル系化合物)のものを併用することで、感度と強度の両方を調節する方法も有効である。さらに、3官能以上のものでエチレンオキサイド鎖長の異なる重合性化合物を併用することが、着色感光性樹脂組成物の現像性を調節することができ、優れたパターン形成能が得られるという点で好ましい。
 また、着色感光性樹脂組成物に含有される他の成分(例えば、光重合開始剤、被分散体、アルカリ可溶性樹脂等)との相溶性、分散性に対しても、重合性化合物の選択・使用法は重要な要因であり、例えば、低純度化合物の使用や2種以上の併用により相溶性を向上させうることがある。また、支持体などの硬質表面との密着性を向上させる観点で特定の構造を選択することもあり得る。
About these polymeric compounds, the details of usage methods, such as the structure, single use, combined use, and addition amount, can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the colored photosensitive resin composition. For example, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the strength of the cured film formed from the colored photosensitive resin composition, those having three or more functional groups are preferable, and further, different functional groups / different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic ester, methacrylate ester, styrene). It is also effective to adjust both sensitivity and strength by using a compound of a vinyl compound or a vinyl ether compound). Furthermore, in combination with tri- or more functional polymerizable compounds having different ethylene oxide chain lengths, the developability of the colored photosensitive resin composition can be adjusted, and an excellent pattern forming ability can be obtained. preferable.
In addition, the selection of the polymerizable compound is also possible with respect to the compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, a photopolymerization initiator, a dispersion, an alkali-soluble resin, etc.) contained in the colored photosensitive resin composition. The method of use is an important factor. For example, compatibility may be improved by using a low-purity compound or using two or more kinds in combination. In addition, a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a support.
 本発明の組成物中における重合性化合物の含有量は、着色感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分に対して3~25質量%が好ましく、5~20質量%がさらに好ましく、7~15質量%が特に好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound in the composition of the present invention is preferably 3 to 25% by mass, more preferably 5 to 20% by mass, and more preferably 7 to 15% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the colored photosensitive resin composition. % Is particularly preferred.
<<他の成分>>
 本発明の組成物は、上述の各成分に加えて、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、さらに、(G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂、有機溶剤、架橋剤などの他の成分を含んでいてもよい。
<< other ingredients >>
In addition to the components described above, the composition of the present invention is a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, and (G) a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain, an organic solvent, a crosslinking agent, etc. May be included.
-(G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂-
 本発明では、さらに、必要に応じて(G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂(以下、「(G)樹脂」ともいう。)を含有させてもよい。(G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂をさらに含有させることで、本発明の組成物をより効果的に硬化させることが可能となる。
-(G) Resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain-
In the present invention, if necessary, a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (G) (hereinafter also referred to as “(G) resin”) may be contained. (G) By further containing a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain, the composition of the present invention can be cured more effectively.
 (G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂としては、側鎖に重合性二重結合を有していれば特に制限はないが、2~6の水酸基を有する重合性モノマー(p)と、他の重合性モノマー(q)との共重合体(a)に、水酸基と反応可能な官能基とエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物(b)を反応させてなる樹脂であることが好ましい。 (G) The resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain is not particularly limited as long as it has a polymerizable double bond in the side chain, but the polymerizable monomer having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups (p) And a copolymer (a) with other polymerizable monomer (q), a resin obtained by reacting a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and a compound (b) having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond Is preferred.
 (G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂を構成する2~6の水酸基を有する重合性モノマー(p)は、2個以上6個以下の水酸基及びエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物であり、例えば下記一般式(1)で示されるモノマーを用いることができる。 (G) The polymerizable monomer having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups constituting the resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (p) has 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. For example, a monomer represented by the following general formula (1) can be used.
一般式(1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 式中、R及びRはそれぞれ水素原子、炭素数1~5の置換されてもよいアルキル基を表し、Rは炭素数1~4のアルキレン基を表し、Rは炭素数1~4のアルキレン基、または単結合を表し、nは2以上6以下の整数を表す。
 上記一般式(1)で示されるモノマーとしては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する多価アルコールのモノエステルなどが挙げられるが、好ましいのはグリセロールモノ(メタ)アクリレートである。
General formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
In the formula, each of R 1 and R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents 1 to C carbon atoms. 4 represents an alkylene group or a single bond, and n represents an integer of 2 or more and 6 or less.
Examples of the monomer represented by the general formula (1) include monoesters of polyhydric alcohols having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and glycerol mono (meth) acrylate is preferred.
 他の重合性モノマー(q)は、2~6の水酸基を有する重合性モノマー(p)と共重合可能な重合性モノマーであり、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、tert-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、テトラヒドロフルフリル(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類;N-ビニルピロリドン;スチレンおよびその誘導体、α-メチルスチレン等のスチレン類;(メタ)アクリルアミド、メチロール(メタ)アクリルアミド、アルコキシメチロール(メタ)アクリルアミド、ジアセトン(メタ)アクリルアミド等のアクリルアミド類;(メタ)アクリロニトリル、エチレン、プロピレン、ブチレン、塩化ビニル、酢酸ビニル等のその他のビニル化合物、およびポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー、ポリスチレンマクロモノマーなどのマクロモノマー類などが挙げられる。これらのモノマーは、1種を単独で、または2種以上を混合して用いることができる。 The other polymerizable monomer (q) is a polymerizable monomer copolymerizable with the polymerizable monomer (p) having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups. For example, (meth) acrylic acid, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl ( (Meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, tert-butyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl ( (Meth) acrylic such as (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, etc. Esters; N-vinylpyrrolidone; styrene and its derivatives, styrenes such as α-methylstyrene; acrylamides such as (meth) acrylamide, methylol (meth) acrylamide, alkoxymethylol (meth) acrylamide, and diacetone (meth) acrylamide; Examples include (meth) acrylonitrile, other vinyl compounds such as ethylene, propylene, butylene, vinyl chloride, and vinyl acetate, and macromonomers such as polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer and polystyrene macromonomer. These monomers can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
 また、2~6の水酸基を有する重合性モノマー(p)と他の重合性モノマー(q)との共重合比は、5~95質量%:95~5質量%であることが好ましく、30~70質量%:70~30質量%であることがより好ましい。重合性モノマー(p)の共重合比が5質量%未満の場合は、導入できるエチレン性不飽和二重結合の数が少なく、二重結合当量(下記式で定義される二重結合当量)の数値が大きくなり、十分な感度を得ることができない。重合性モノマー(p)の共重合比が95質量%を越える場合は、多くのエチレン性不飽和二重結合を導入することが可能となるが、重合性モノマー(q)の比率が低くなるため、分散安定性、溶解性、耐薬品性等の物性を維持することが困難となる。 The copolymerization ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups and the other polymerizable monomer (q) is preferably 5 to 95% by mass: 95 to 5% by mass, 70% by mass: More preferably, it is 70 to 30% by mass. When the copolymerization ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) is less than 5% by mass, the number of ethylenically unsaturated double bonds that can be introduced is small, and the double bond equivalent (double bond equivalent defined by the following formula) The numerical value becomes large and sufficient sensitivity cannot be obtained. When the copolymerization ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) exceeds 95% by mass, it becomes possible to introduce many ethylenically unsaturated double bonds, but the ratio of the polymerizable monomer (q) becomes low. It is difficult to maintain physical properties such as dispersion stability, solubility, and chemical resistance.
 2~6の水酸基を有する重合性モノマー(p)と、他の重合性モノマー(q)との共重合体(a)の製造は、公知の方法で製造することができ、例えば特開2005-156930号公報の段落0013の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A copolymer (a) of a polymerizable monomer (p) having 2 to 6 hydroxyl groups and another polymerizable monomer (q) can be produced by a known method. No. 156930, paragraph 0013 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 (G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂は、前記共重合体(a)に、水酸基と反応可能な官能基とエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物(b)を反応させることにより得られる。水酸基と反応可能な官能基とエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物(b)の水酸基と反応可能な官能基としては、イソシアネート基、カルボキシル基等が挙げられるが、特に反応性の点でイソシアネート基が好ましい。
 イソシアネート基及びエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物として具体的には、2-アクリロイルエチルイソシアネート、2-メタクリロイルエチルイソシアネート等が挙げられる。また、カルボキシル基及びエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物として具体的には、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、無水マレイン酸が挙げられる。
(G) The resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain is obtained by reacting the copolymer (a) with a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and a compound (b) having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Is obtained. Examples of the functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group of the compound (b) having a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include an isocyanate group and a carboxyl group. Groups are preferred.
Specific examples of the compound having an isocyanate group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include 2-acryloylethyl isocyanate and 2-methacryloylethyl isocyanate. Specific examples of the compound having a carboxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, and maleic anhydride.
 共重合体(a)に水酸基を介して導入されるエチレン性不飽和二重結合の量は、得られる樹脂の「二重結合当量」により示される。二重結合当量とは、分子中に含まれる二重結合量の尺度となるものであり、同じ分子量の感光性樹脂であれば、二重結合当量の数値が小さいほど二重結合の導入量が多くなる。
[二重結合当量]=[繰り返し構成単位の分子量]/[繰り返し構成単位中の二重結合の数]
 本発明における(G)樹脂の二重結合当量は200~2,000であることが好ましく、300~900であることがより好ましい。(G)樹脂の二重結合当量が200未満の場合は、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を導入させる重合性モノマー(p)の比率が高くなり、諸特性を維持するのに十分な量の重合性モノマー(q)を共重合させることができない。2,000を越える場合は、エチレン性不飽和二重結合の数が少ないため十分な感度を得ることができない。
 また、前記(G)樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、本発明の組成物の分散性が良好な点から、好ましくは2000~200000、より好ましくは5000~50000である。
The amount of ethylenically unsaturated double bonds introduced into the copolymer (a) via a hydroxyl group is indicated by the “double bond equivalent” of the resulting resin. The double bond equivalent is a measure of the amount of double bonds contained in the molecule. If the photosensitive resin has the same molecular weight, the smaller the double bond equivalent value, the more the amount of double bonds introduced. Become more.
[Double bond equivalent] = [molecular weight of repeating structural unit] / [number of double bonds in repeating structural unit]
In the present invention, the double bond equivalent of the (G) resin is preferably 200 to 2,000, and more preferably 300 to 900. (G) When the double bond equivalent of the resin is less than 200, the ratio of the polymerizable monomer (p) for introducing the ethylenically unsaturated double bond is high, and a sufficient amount of polymerization to maintain various properties Monomer (q) cannot be copolymerized. When it exceeds 2,000, sufficient sensitivity cannot be obtained because the number of ethylenically unsaturated double bonds is small.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the (G) resin is preferably 2000 to 200000, more preferably 5000 to 50000 from the viewpoint of good dispersibility of the composition of the present invention.
 共重合体(a)と、水酸基と反応可能な官能基とエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物(b)との反応は、公知の方法で行うことができ、例えば特開2005-156930号公報の段落0016の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The reaction between the copolymer (a) and the compound (b) having a functional group capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated double bond can be carried out by a known method, for example, JP-A-2005-156930. Reference can be made to the description of paragraph 0016 of the publication, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本発明の組成物が(G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂を含有する場合、(G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂の含有量は、樹脂成分に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは20~90質量%であり、さらに好ましくは30~80質量%である。
 (G)側鎖に重合性二重結合を有する樹脂は、本発明の組成物中に1種のみ含まれていても良いし、2種以上含まれていても良い。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (G), the content of the resin having a polymerizable double bond in the side chain (G) is as follows: The amount is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and still more preferably 30 to 80% by mass.
(G) 1 type of resin which has a polymerizable double bond in a side chain may be contained in the composition of this invention, and may be contained 2 or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
-アルカリ可溶性樹脂-
 本発明の組成物は、さらに、バインダーとしてアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有していてもよい。なお、ここでいうアルカリ可溶性樹脂には、分散剤成分として本発明の組成物に含有される成分は含まれない。
-Alkali-soluble resin-
The composition of the present invention may further contain an alkali-soluble resin as a binder. In addition, the component contained in the composition of this invention as an dispersing agent component is not contained in alkali-soluble resin here.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、線状有機高分子重合体であって、分子(好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin is a linear organic polymer, and promotes at least one alkali-solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having a group. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acryl / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable. From the viewpoint of development control, acrylic resins and acrylamide resins are preferable. Resins and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
 アルカリ可溶性を促進する基(以下、酸基ともいう)としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基などが挙げられるが、有機溶剤に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましいものとして挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。 Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility (hereinafter also referred to as an acid group) include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. The group is soluble in an organic solvent and developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution. Possible are preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 前記重合後に酸基を付与しうるモノマーとしては、例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の水酸基を有するモノマー、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等のエポキシ基を有するモノマー、2-イソシアナートエチル(メタ)アクリレート等のイソシアネート基を有するモノマー等が挙げられる。これら酸基を導入するための単量体は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。アルカリ可溶性樹脂に酸基を導入するには、例えば、酸基を有するモノマーおよび/または重合後に酸基を付与しうるモノマー(以下「酸基を導入するための単量体」と称することもある。)を、単量体成分として重合するようにすればよい。
 なお、重合後に酸基を付与しうるモノマーを単量体成分として酸基を導入する場合には、重合後に例えば後述するような酸基を付与するための処理が必要となる。
Examples of the monomer capable of imparting an acid group after the polymerization include a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a monomer having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-isocyanatoethyl (methacrylate). ) Monomers having an isocyanate group such as acrylate. These monomers for introducing an acid group may be only one type or two or more types. In order to introduce an acid group into an alkali-soluble resin, for example, a monomer having an acid group and / or a monomer capable of imparting an acid group after polymerization (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “monomer for introducing an acid group”) .) May be polymerized as a monomer component.
In addition, when introducing an acid group using a monomer capable of imparting an acid group after polymerization as a monomer component, for example, a treatment for imparting an acid group as described later is required after the polymerization.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用することができる。ラジカル重合法でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類およびその量、溶媒の種類等々の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めるようにすることもできる。 For the production of the alkali-soluble resin, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂として用いられる線状有機高分子重合体としては、側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマーが好ましく、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体、ノボラック型樹脂などのアルカリ可溶性フェノール樹脂等、並びに側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、水酸基を有するポリマーに酸無水物を付加させたもの挙げられる。特に、(メタ)アクリル酸と、これと共重合可能な他の単量体との共重合体が、アルカリ可溶性樹脂として好適である。(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他の単量体としては、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート、アリール(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル化合物などが挙げられる。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートおよびアリール(メタ)アクリレートとしては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、トリル(メタ)アクリレート、ナフチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等、ビニル化合物としては、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、グリシジルメタクリレート、アクリロニトリル、ビニルアセテート、N-ビニルピロリドン、テトラヒドロフルフリルメタクリレート、ポリスチレンマクロモノマー、ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー等、特開平10-300922号公報に記載のN位置換マレイミドモノマーとして、N―フェニルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド等を挙げることができる。なお、これらの(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他の単量体は1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。 As the linear organic polymer used as the alkali-soluble resin, a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable, such as a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, and a crotonic acid copolymer. , Maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, alkali-soluble phenolic resins such as novolak resins, etc., acid cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, and acid anhydrides added to polymers having a hydroxyl group. Can be mentioned. In particular, a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable as the alkali-soluble resin. Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds. As alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, Examples of vinyl compounds such as hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, glycidyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, polystyrene Macromonomer, polymethylmethacrylate macromonomer, as N-position-substituted maleimide monomer described in JP-A-10-300922, may be mentioned N- phenylmaleimide, an N- cyclohexyl maleimide and the like. In addition, only 1 type may be sufficient as the other monomer copolymerizable with these (meth) acrylic acids, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、下記一般式(ED)で示される化合物(以下「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)を必須とする単量体成分を重合してなるポリマー(a)を含むことも好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin may include a polymer (a) obtained by polymerizing a monomer component which essentially includes a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “ether dimer”). preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 一般式(ED)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。 In general formula (ED), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
 これにより、本発明の着色組成物は、耐熱性とともに透明性にも極めて優れた硬化塗膜を形成しうる。前記エーテルダイマーを示す前記一般式(ED)中、RおよびRで表される置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、n-ブチル、イソブチル、tert-ブチル、tert-アミル、ステアリル、ラウリル、2-エチルヘキシル等の直鎖状または分岐状のアルキル基;フェニル等のアリール基;シクロヘキシル、tert-ブチルシクロヘキシル、ジシクロペンタジエニル、トリシクロデカニル、イソボルニル、アダマンチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチル等の脂環式基;1-メトキシエチル、1-エトキシエチル等のアルコキシで置換されたアルキル基;ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基;等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、メチル、エチル、シクロヘキシル、ベンジル等のような酸や熱で脱離しにくい1級または2級炭素の置換基が耐熱性の点で好ましい。 Thereby, the coloring composition of this invention can form the cured coating film which was very excellent also in transparency with heat resistance. In the general formula (ED) showing the ether dimer, the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited. Linear or branched alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; Alicyclic groups such as cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl; and the like. Among these, an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is difficult to be removed by heat is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
 前記エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、ジメチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジエチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(n-プロピル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(イソプロピル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(n-ブチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(イソブチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(tert-ブチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(tert-アミル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(ステアリル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(ラウリル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(2-エチルヘキシル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(1-メトキシエチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(1-エトキシエチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジベンジル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジフェニル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(tert-ブチルシクロヘキシル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(ジシクロペンタジエニル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(トリシクロデカニル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(イソボルニル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジアダマンチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(2-メチル-2-アダマンチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、ジメチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジエチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジベンジル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエートが好ましい。これらエーテルダイマーは、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。前記一般式(ED)で示される化合物由来の構造体は、その他の単量体を共重合させてもよい。 Specific examples of the ether dimer include dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, (N-propyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isopropyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (n-butyl) ) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobutyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl) -2, 2 '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-amyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis 2-propenoate, di (stearyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (lauryl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di ( 2-ethylhexyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (1-methoxyethyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (1 -Ethoxyethyl) -2,2 '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dibenzyl-2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diphenyl-2,2 '-[oxybis (Methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoe Di (tert-butylcyclohexyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (dicyclopentadienyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2 -Propenoate, di (tricyclodecanyl) -2,2 '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobornyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, And diadamantyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (2-methyl-2-adamantyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate It is done. Among these, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2′- [Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred. These ether dimers may be only one kind or two or more kinds. The structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
 また、本発明における着色組成物の架橋効率を向上させるために、重合性基を有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂を使用してもよい。重合性基を有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、アリル基、(メタ)アクリル基、アリルオキシアルキル基等を側鎖に含有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂等が有用である。上述の重合性基を含有するポリマーの例としては、ダイヤナ-ルNRシリーズ(三菱レイヨン株式会社製)、Photomer6173(COOH含有 polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.Ltd.,製)、ビスコートR-264、KSレジスト106(いずれも大阪有機化学工業株式会社製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ、プラクセル CF200シリーズ(いずれもダイセル化学工業株式会社製)、Ebecryl3800(ダイセルユーシービー株式会社製)などが挙げられる。これら重合性基を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、予めイソシアネート基とOH基を反応させ、未反応のイソシアネート基を1つ残し、かつ(メタ)アクリロイル基を含む化合物とカルボキシル基を含むアクリル樹脂との反応によって得られるウレタン変性した重合性二重結合含有アクリル樹脂、カルボキシル基を含むアクリル樹脂と分子内にエポキシ基および重合性二重結合を共に有する化合物との反応によって得られる不飽和基含有アクリル樹脂、酸ペンダント型エポキシアクリレート樹脂、OH基を含むアクリル樹脂と重合性二重結合を有する2塩基酸無水物を反応させた重合性二重結合含有アクリル樹脂、OH基を含むアクリル樹脂とイソシアネートと重合性基を有する化合物を反応させた樹脂、特開2002-229207号公報および特開2003-335814号公報に記載されるα位またはβ位にハロゲン原子或いはスルホネート基などの脱離基を有するエステル基を側鎖に有する樹脂を、塩基性処理することで得られる樹脂などが好ましい。 Moreover, in order to improve the crosslinking efficiency of the colored composition in the present invention, an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group may be used. As the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group, an alkali-soluble resin containing an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group or the like in the side chain is useful. Examples of the above-described polymer containing a polymerizable group include a dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co. Ltd., manufactured by Viscoat R-264), Examples thereof include KS resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Cyclomer P series, Plaxel, CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Ebecryl 3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Corporation), and the like. As an alkali-soluble resin containing these polymerizable groups, an isocyanate group and an OH group are reacted in advance to leave one unreacted isocyanate group and a compound containing a (meth) acryloyl group and an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group; Urethane-modified polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by the above reaction, unsaturated group-containing acrylic obtained by reaction of an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group and a compound having both an epoxy group and a polymerizable double bond in the molecule Resin, acid pendant type epoxy acrylate resin, OH group-containing acrylic resin and polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by reacting a polymerizable double bond, OH group-containing acrylic resin and isocyanate Resin obtained by reacting compound having polymerizable group, JP 2002-229207 A Resin obtained by basic treatment of a resin having an ester group having a leaving group such as a halogen atom or a sulfonate group at the α-position or β-position described in JP-A-2003-335814 Etc. are preferable.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、特に、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸共重合体やベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/他のモノマーからなる多元共重合体が好適である。この他、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートを共重合したもの、特開平7-140654号公報に記載の2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシ-3-フェノキシプロピルアクリレート/ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクレート/メタクリル酸共重合体などが挙げられ、特に好ましくはメタクリル酸ベンジル/メタクリル酸の共重合体等が挙げられる。 As the alkali-soluble resin, in particular, a benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer and a multi-component copolymer composed of benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers are suitable. In addition, copolymers of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer described in JP-A-7-140654, 2-hydroxy- 3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / Examples thereof include benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymers, and particularly preferred are benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymers.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、特開2012-208494号公報段落0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0685]~[0700])以降の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 さらに、特開2012-32767号公報に記載の段落番号0029~0063に記載の共重合体(B)および実施例で用いられているアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2012-208474号公報の段落番号0088~0098に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2012-137531号公報の段落番号0022~0032に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2013-024934号公報の段落番号0132~0143に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2011-242752号公報の段落番号0092~0098および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2012-032770号公報の段落番号0030~0072の記載のバインダー樹脂を用いること好ましい。これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。より具体的には、下記の樹脂が好ましい。
As the alkali-soluble resin, the description in paragraphs 0558 to 0571 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0685] to [0700] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to and the contents thereof can be referred to. Is incorporated herein.
Further, the copolymer (B) described in paragraph Nos. 0029 to 0063 described in JP 2012-32767 A and the alkali-soluble resin used in Examples, paragraph Nos. 0088 to 2020 of JP 2012-208474 A The binder resin described in 0098 and the binder resin used in Examples, the binder resin described in Paragraph Nos. 0022 to 0032 of JP 2012-137531 B, and the binder resin used in Examples, The binder resin described in paragraph Nos. 0132 to 0143 of No. 024934 and the binder resin used in Examples, the binder resin used in paragraph Nos. 0092 to 0098 and Examples of JP 2011-242752 A, Paragraph No. of Kokai 2012-032770 It preferred to use a binder resin according to 030-0072. These contents are incorporated herein. More specifically, the following resins are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価としては好ましくは30mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/g、より好ましくは50mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gであることが好ましく、70mgKOH/g~120mgKOH/gであることが最も好ましい。
 また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)としては、2,000~50,000が好ましく、5,000~30,000がさらに好ましく、7,000~20,000が最も好ましい。
The acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and most preferably 70 mgKOH / g to 120 mgKOH / g.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 2,000 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000, and most preferably 7,000 to 20,000.
 着色組成物中にアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する場合、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の着色組成物中における含有量としては、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、1質量%~15質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは、2質量%~12質量%であり、特に好ましくは、3質量%~10質量%である。
 本発明の組成物は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the alkali-soluble resin is contained in the coloring composition, the content of the alkali-soluble resin in the coloring composition is preferably 1% by mass to 15% by mass, more preferably based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is 2% by mass to 12% by mass, and particularly preferably 3% by mass to 10% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
-有機溶剤-
 本発明の組成物は、有機溶剤を含有してもよい。
 有機溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色感光性樹脂組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はないが、特に紫外線吸収剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂や分散剤等の溶解性、塗布性、安全性を考慮して選ばれることが好ましい。また、本発明における組成物を調製する際には、少なくとも2種類の有機溶剤を含むことが好ましい。
-Organic solvent-
The composition of the present invention may contain an organic solvent.
The organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the colored photosensitive resin composition are satisfied, but in particular, the solubility and coating of ultraviolet absorbers, alkali-soluble resins and dispersants, etc. Is preferably selected in consideration of safety and safety. Moreover, when preparing the composition in this invention, it is preferable that at least 2 type of organic solvent is included.
 有機溶剤としては、エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸アルキル(例:オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:3-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-オキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:2-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等、並びに、エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等、並びに、ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等、並びに、芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン等が好適に挙げられる。 Examples of organic solvents include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and oxyacetic acid. Alkyl (eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), 3-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters ( Examples: methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate etc. (for example, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate etc.)) 2-Oxypropio Acid alkyl esters (eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methoxypropionic acid) Propyl, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (eg 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate) Methyl acrylate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, etc., and Ethers such as di Tylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene Glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc., and ketones, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, etc., and aromatic hydrocarbons, for example, toluene, xylene, etc. But Preferably mentioned.
 これらの有機溶剤は、紫外線吸収剤およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂の溶解性、塗布面状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合することも好ましい。この場合、特に好ましくは、上記の3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液である。 These organic solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoints of solubility of the ultraviolet absorber and the alkali-soluble resin, improvement of the coated surface, and the like. In this case, particularly preferably, the above-mentioned methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
 有機溶剤の組成物中における含有量は、塗布性の観点から、組成物の全固形分濃度が5質量%~80質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5質量%~60質量%がさらに好ましく、10質量%~50質量%が特に好ましい。 The content of the organic solvent in the composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the composition is 5% by mass to 80% by mass from the viewpoint of applicability, and is further 5% by mass to 60% by mass. 10% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
-架橋剤-
 本発明の組成物に補足的に架橋剤を用い、組成物を硬化させてなる硬化膜の硬度をより高めることもできる。
 架橋剤としては、架橋反応により膜硬化を行なえるものであれば、特に限定はなく、例えば、(a)エポキシ樹脂、(b)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、メラミン化合物、グアナミン化合物、グリコールウリル化合物またはウレア化合物、(c)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、フェノール化合物、ナフトール化合物またはヒドロキシアントラセン化合物、が挙げられる。中でも、多官能エポキシ樹脂が好ましい。
 架橋剤の具体例などの詳細については、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0134~0147の記載を参照することができる。
 本発明の組成物中に架橋剤を含有する場合、架橋剤の配合量は、特に定めるものではないが、組成物の全固形分の2~30質量%が好ましく、3~20質量%がより好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は、架橋剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
-Crosslinking agent-
It is also possible to supplement the composition of the present invention with a crosslinking agent to further increase the hardness of a cured film obtained by curing the composition.
The crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction. For example, at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Substituted with at least one substituent selected from a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, a glycoluril compound or a urea compound, (c) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group, which is substituted with one substituent; Phenol compounds, naphthol compounds or hydroxyanthracene compounds. Of these, polyfunctional epoxy resins are preferred.
For details such as specific examples of the crosslinking agent, the description in paragraphs 0134 to 0147 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 can be referred to.
When the composition of the present invention contains a crosslinking agent, the blending amount of the crosslinking agent is not particularly defined, but is preferably 2 to 30% by mass, more preferably 3 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. preferable.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of cross-linking agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
-重合禁止剤-
 本発明の組成物においては、前記組成物の製造中または保存中において、重合性化合物の不要な熱重合を阻止するために、少量の重合禁止剤を添加することが望ましい。
 本発明に用いうる重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン第一セリウム塩等が挙げられる。
 本発明の組成物中に重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の添加量は、全組成物の質量に対して、約0.01質量%~約5質量%が好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は、重合禁止剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
-Polymerization inhibitor-
In the composition of the present invention, it is desirable to add a small amount of a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the composition.
Examples of the polymerization inhibitor that can be used in the present invention include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6- tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
When a polymerization inhibitor is contained in the composition of the present invention, the addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably about 0.01% by mass to about 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the whole composition.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
-界面活性剤-
 本発明の組成物には、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を添加してもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。
-Surfactant-
Various surfactants may be added to the composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
 特に、本発明の組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。
 即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する組成物を適用した塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力を低下させることにより、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、少量の液量で数μm程度の薄膜を形成した場合であっても、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行える点で有効である。
In particular, since the composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved. Sex can be improved more.
That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, the wettability to the coated surface is reduced by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid. Is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several μm is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3質量%~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5質量%~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7質量%~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780、同F781(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレートおよびプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセリンエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル(BASF社製のプルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株))等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the nonionic surfactant include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1) Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、フタロシアニン誘導体(商品名:EFKA-745、森下産業(株)製)、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.).
 アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)社製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製「トーレシリコーンDC3PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH7PA」、「トーレシリコーンDC11PA」,「トーレシリコーンSH21PA」,「トーレシリコーンSH28PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH29PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH30PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH8400」、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製「TSF-4440」、「TSF-4300」、「TSF-4445」、「TSF-4460」、「TSF-4452」、信越シリコーン株式会社製「KP341」、「KF6001」、「KF6002」、ビックケミー社製「BYK307」、「BYK323」、「BYK330」等が挙げられる。
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。
 本発明の組成物に界面活性剤を含有する場合、界面活性剤の添加量は、組成物の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005質量%~1.0質量%である。
 本発明の組成物は、界面活性剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
Examples of the silicone surfactant include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Toray Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd. Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, Momentive Performance Materials TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF -4552 "," KP341 "," KF6001 "," KF6002 "manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.," BYK307 "," BYK323 "," BYK330 "manufactured by BYK Chemie.
Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
When a surfactant is contained in the composition of the present invention, the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition. 005 mass% to 1.0 mass%.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
-その他の添加物-
 本発明の組成物には、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加物としては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0155~0156に記載のものを挙げることができる。
 本発明の組成物においては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0078に記載の増感剤や光安定剤、同公報の段落0081に記載の熱重合防止剤を含有することができる。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、具体的に以下の化合物を用いることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
-Other additives-
Various additives, for example, fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents, and the like can be blended with the composition of the present invention as necessary. Examples of these additives include those described in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A No. 2004-295116.
The composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
Specifically, the following compounds are preferably used as the ultraviolet absorber.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
--有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物--
 本発明の組成物は、分子量1000以下の有機カルボン酸、および/または有機カルボン酸無水物を含有していてもよい。
 有機カルボン酸化合物としては、具体的には、脂肪族カルボン酸または芳香族カルボン酸が挙げられる。脂肪族カルボン酸としては、例えば、ギ酸、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、吉草酸、ピバル酸、カプロン酸、グリコール酸、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸等のモノカルボン酸、シュウ酸、マロン酸、コハク酸、グルタル酸、アジピン酸、ピメリン酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸、シクロヘキセンジカルボン酸、イタコン酸、シトラコン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸等のジカルボン酸、トリカルバリル酸、アコニット酸等のトリカルボン酸等が挙げられる。また、芳香族カルボン酸としては、例えば、安息香酸、フタル酸等のフェニル基に直接カルボキシル基が結合したカルボン酸、およびフェニル基から炭素結合を介してカルボキシル基が結合したカルボン酸類が挙げられる。これらの中では、特に分子量600以下、とりわけ分子量50~500のもの、具体的には、例えば、マレイン酸、マロン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸が好ましい。
--- Organic carboxylic acid, organic carboxylic anhydride--
The composition of the present invention may contain an organic carboxylic acid having a molecular weight of 1000 or less and / or an organic carboxylic acid anhydride.
Specific examples of the organic carboxylic acid compound include aliphatic carboxylic acids and aromatic carboxylic acids. Examples of aliphatic carboxylic acids include monocarboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, Examples thereof include dicarboxylic acids such as glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, cyclohexenedicarboxylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid and fumaric acid, and tricarboxylic acids such as tricarbaryl acid and aconitic acid. Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid include carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group such as benzoic acid and phthalic acid, and carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond. Of these, those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500, specifically maleic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, and itaconic acid are preferred.
 有機カルボン酸無水物としては、例えば、脂肪族カルボン酸無水物、芳香族カルボン酸無水物が挙げられ、具体的には、例えば、無水酢酸、無水トリクロロ酢酸、無水トリフルオロ酢酸、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水シトラコン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水グルタル酸、無水1,2-シクロヘキセンジカルボン酸、無水n-オクタデシルコハク酸、無水5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸等の脂肪族カルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。芳香族カルボン酸無水物としては、例えば、無水フタル酸、トリメリット酸無水物、ピロメリット酸無水物、無水ナフタル酸等が挙げられる。これらの中では、特に分子量600以下、とりわけ分子量50~500のもの、具体的には、例えば、無水マレイン酸、無水コハク酸、無水シトラコン酸、無水イタコン酸が好ましい。 Examples of organic carboxylic acid anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples include acetic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, and tetrahydrophthalic anhydride. Succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, glutaric anhydride, 1,2-cyclohexene dicarboxylic anhydride, n-octadecyl succinic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, etc. An aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydride is mentioned. Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride include phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride. Of these, those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500, specifically maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, and itaconic anhydride are preferred.
 本発明の組成物に有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物を含有する場合、これらの有機カルボン酸および/または有機カルボン酸無水物の添加量は、通常、全固形分中0.01~10質量%、好ましくは0.03~5質量%、より好ましくは0.05~3質量%の範囲である。
 これら分子量1000以下の有機カルボン酸、および/または有機カルボン酸無水物を添加することによって、高いパターン密着性を保ちながら、組成物の未溶解物の残存をより一層低減することが可能である。
When the composition of the present invention contains an organic carboxylic acid or an organic carboxylic acid anhydride, the amount of these organic carboxylic acid and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydride is usually 0.01 to 10 mass in the total solid content. %, Preferably 0.03 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 3% by mass.
By adding these organic carboxylic acids and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydrides having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, it is possible to further reduce the remaining undissolved material of the composition while maintaining high pattern adhesion.
<着色感光性樹脂組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の組成物は、前述の成分を混合することで調製される。
 なお、組成物の調製に際しては、組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液・分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
<Preparation method of colored photosensitive resin composition>
The composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
In preparing the composition, the components constituting the composition may be combined at once, or may be sequentially combined after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the charging order and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
 上記のようにして調製された組成物は、好ましくは、孔径0.01μm~3.0μm、より好ましくは孔径0.05μm~0.5μm程度のフィルタなどを用いて濾別した後、使用に供することができる。 The composition prepared as described above is preferably subjected to use after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of about 0.01 μm to 3.0 μm, more preferably about 0.05 μm to 0.5 μm. be able to.
 本発明の組成物は、耐熱性および色特性に優れた硬化膜を形成することができるため、カラーフィルタの着色パターン(着色層)を形成するために好適に用いられる。また、本発明の組成物は、固体撮像素子(例えば、CCD、CMOS等)や、液晶表示装置(LCD)などの画像表示装置に用いられるカラーフィルタなどの着色パターン形成用として好適に用いることができる。さらに、印刷インキ、インクジェットインキおよび塗料などの作製用途としても好適に用いることができる。なかでも、CCDおよびCMOS等の固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを作製用途として好適に用いることができる。 Since the composition of the present invention can form a cured film having excellent heat resistance and color characteristics, it is suitably used for forming a color pattern (colored layer) of a color filter. The composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a colored pattern such as a color filter used in a solid-state imaging device (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.) or an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD). it can. Furthermore, it can be suitably used as a production application for printing ink, inkjet ink, paint, and the like. In particular, a color filter for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD and a CMOS can be suitably used as a production application.
<硬化膜、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタおよびカラーフィルタの製造方法>
 次に、本発明における着色硬化膜、パターン形成方法およびカラーフィルタについて詳述する。
<Curing film, pattern forming method, color filter, and color filter manufacturing method>
Next, the colored cured film, the pattern forming method, and the color filter in the present invention will be described in detail.
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、本発明の着色感光性樹脂組成物を支持体上に付与して着色感光性樹脂組成物層(以下、「着色組成物層」ともいう。)を形成する着色感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程と、前記着色組成物層をパターン様に露光する露光工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成するパターン形成工程と、を含む。
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、カラーフィルタが有する着色パターン(画素)の形成に好適に適用することができる。
In the pattern forming method of the present invention, a colored photosensitive resin composition layer (hereinafter also referred to as “colored composition layer”) is formed by applying the colored photosensitive resin composition of the present invention on a support. A photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, an exposure step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern manner, and a pattern forming step of developing and removing unexposed portions to form a colored pattern.
The pattern forming method of the present invention can be suitably applied to the formation of a colored pattern (pixel) included in a color filter.
 本発明のパターン形成方法によりパターンを形成する支持体としては、基板等の板状物の他、パターン形成に適用しうる支持体であれば特に限定されない。 The support for forming a pattern by the pattern forming method of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a support applicable to pattern formation in addition to a plate-like material such as a substrate.
 以下、本発明のパターン形成方法における各工程については、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタの製造方法を通じて詳細に説明するが、本発明はこの方法に限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, each step in the pattern forming method of the present invention will be described in detail through a method for manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state imaging device, but the present invention is not limited to this method.
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、本発明のパターン形成方法を適用するものであり、本発明のパターン形成方法を用いて、支持体上に着色パターンを形成する工程と、を含む。
 即ち、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、本発明のパターン形成方法を適用するものであり、本発明の着色感光性樹脂組成物を支持体上に適用して着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程と、前記着色感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程と、を含むことを特徴とする。さらに、必要に応じて、着色感光性樹脂組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像された着色パターンをベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。以下、これらの工程をあわせて、パターン形成工程ということがある。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、上記製造方法により好適に得ることができる。
 以下、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを単に「カラーフィルタ」ということがある。
The method for producing a color filter of the present invention applies the pattern forming method of the present invention, and includes a step of forming a colored pattern on a support using the pattern forming method of the present invention.
That is, the method for producing a color filter of the present invention applies the pattern forming method of the present invention. The colored photosensitive resin composition layer of the present invention is applied on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer. And a step of exposing the colored photosensitive resin composition layer in a pattern, and a step of developing and removing an unexposed portion to form a colored pattern. Further, if necessary, a step of baking the colored photosensitive resin composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of baking the developed colored pattern (post-baking step) may be provided. Hereinafter, these steps may be collectively referred to as a pattern forming step.
The color filter of the present invention can be suitably obtained by the above production method.
Hereinafter, the color filter for the solid-state imaging device may be simply referred to as “color filter”.
 本発明のパターン形成方法における各工程については、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法を通じて以下に詳述する。 Each step in the pattern forming method of the present invention will be described in detail below through the color filter manufacturing method of the present invention.
<着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程>
 着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程では、支持体上に、本発明の組成物を適用して着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する。
<Step of forming a colored photosensitive resin composition layer>
In the step of forming the colored photosensitive resin composition layer, the colored photosensitive resin composition layer is formed on the support by applying the composition of the present invention.
 本工程に用いうる支持体としては、例えば、基板(例えば、シリコン基板)上にCCD(Charge Coupled Device)やCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)等の撮像素子(受光素子)が設けられた固体撮像素子用基板を用いることができる。
 本発明における着色パターンは、固体撮像素子用基板の撮像素子形成面側(おもて面)に形成されてもよいし、撮像素子非形成面側(裏面)に形成されてもよい。
 固体撮像素子における着色パターンの間や、固体撮像素子用基板の裏面には、遮光膜が設けられていてもよい。
 また、支持体上には、必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下塗り層を設けてもよい。
As a support that can be used in this step, for example, a solid-state imaging device in which an imaging element (light-receiving element) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) is provided on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate). An element substrate can be used.
The colored pattern in the present invention may be formed on the imaging element forming surface side (front surface) of the solid-state imaging element substrate, or may be formed on the imaging element non-forming surface side (back surface).
A light shielding film may be provided between the colored patterns in the solid-state image sensor or on the back surface of the substrate for the solid-state image sensor.
Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
 支持体上への本発明の組成物の適用方法としては、スリット塗布、インクジェット法、回転塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布、スクリーン印刷法等の各種の塗布方法を適用することができる。 As the application method of the composition of the present invention on the support, various coating methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, screen printing method and the like can be applied.
 支持体上に塗布された着色感光性樹脂組成物層の乾燥(プリベーク)は、ホットプレート、オーブン等で50℃~140℃の温度で10秒~300秒で行うことができる。 The colored photosensitive resin composition layer coated on the support can be dried (prebaked) at a temperature of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C. for 10 seconds to 300 seconds using a hot plate, oven or the like.
<<着色感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程(フォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成する場合)>>
-露光工程-
 露光工程では、着色感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程において形成された着色感光性樹脂組成物層を、例えば、ステッパー等の露光装置を用い、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介してパターン露光する。これにより、硬化膜が得られる。
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、特に、g線、i線等の紫外線が好ましく(特に好ましくはi線)用いられる。照射量(露光量)は30mJ/cm~1500mJ/cmが好ましく50mJ/cm~1000mJ/cmがより好ましく、80mJ/cm~500mJ/cmが最も好ましい。
<< Step of exposing colored photosensitive resin composition layer to pattern (when pattern is formed by photolithography method) >>
-Exposure process-
In the exposure step, the colored photosensitive resin composition layer formed in the colored photosensitive resin composition layer forming step is subjected to pattern exposure through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure device such as a stepper, for example. Thereby, a cured film is obtained.
As radiation (light) that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are particularly preferable (particularly preferably i-line). Irradiation dose (exposure dose) is more preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ~ 1500mJ / cm 2 is preferably 50mJ / cm 2 ~ 1000mJ / cm 2, and most preferably 80mJ / cm 2 ~ 500mJ / cm 2.
 硬化膜の膜厚は1.0μm以下であることが好ましく、0.1μm~0.9μmであることがより好ましく、0.2μm~0.8μmであることがさらに好ましい。
 膜厚を、1.0μm以下とすることにより、高解像性、高密着性を得られるため、好ましい。
 また、本工程においては、0.7μm以下の薄い膜厚を有する硬化膜も好適に形成することができ、得られた硬化膜を、後述するパターン形成工程にて現像処理することで、薄膜でありながらも、現像性、表面荒れ抑制、およびパターン形状に優れた着色パターンを得ることができる。
The thickness of the cured film is preferably 1.0 μm or less, more preferably 0.1 μm to 0.9 μm, and further preferably 0.2 μm to 0.8 μm.
It is preferable to set the film thickness to 1.0 μm or less because high resolution and high adhesion can be obtained.
In addition, in this step, a cured film having a thin film thickness of 0.7 μm or less can also be suitably formed, and the obtained cured film is developed in a pattern forming process described later, thereby forming a thin film. Although it exists, the coloring pattern excellent in developability, surface roughness suppression, and pattern shape can be obtained.
<<<着色パターンを形成する工程>>>
 次いでアルカリ現像処理を行うことにより、露光工程における光未照射部分の着色感光性樹脂組成物層がアルカリ水溶液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。
 現像液としては、下地の撮像素子や回路などにダメージを起さない、有機アルカリ現像液が望ましい。現像温度としては通常20℃~30℃であり、現像時間は、従来20秒~90秒であった。より残渣を除去するため、近年では120秒~180秒実施する場合もある。さらには、より残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返す場合もある。
<<< Process for forming colored pattern >>>
Next, by performing an alkali development treatment, the colored photosensitive resin composition layer in the light unirradiated portion in the exposure step is eluted in the alkaline aqueous solution, and only the photocured portion remains.
The developer is preferably an organic alkali developer that does not cause damage to the underlying image sensor or circuit. The development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is conventionally 20 seconds to 90 seconds. In order to remove the residue more, in recent years, it may be carried out for 120 seconds to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to further improve residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and further supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
 現像液に用いるアルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5、4、0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられ、これらのアルカリ剤を濃度が0.001質量%~10質量%、好ましくは0.01質量%~1質量%となるように純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液が現像液として好ましく使用される。
 なお、現像液には無機アルカリを用いてもよく、無機アルカリとしては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウムなどが好ましい。
 なお、このようなアルカリ性水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、一般に現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)する。
Examples of the alkaline agent used in the developer include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide. Organic alkaline compounds such as choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0] -7-undecene, and the concentration of these alkaline agents is 0.001 to 10% by mass, An alkaline aqueous solution diluted with pure water so as to be preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass is preferably used as the developer.
In addition, an inorganic alkali may be used for the developer, and as the inorganic alkali, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metaoxalate and the like are preferable.
In the case where a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution is used, it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
 次いで、乾燥を施した後に加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。多色の着色パターンを形成するのであれば、色ごとに前記工程を順次繰り返して硬化皮膜を製造することができる。これによりカラーフィルタが得られる。
 ポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の加熱処理であり、通常100℃~240℃、好ましくは200℃~240℃の熱硬化処理を行う。
 このポストベーク処理は、現像後の塗布膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。
Next, it is preferable to perform heat treatment (post-bake) after drying. If a multicolor coloring pattern is formed, the said process can be repeated sequentially for every color, and a cured film can be manufactured. Thereby, a color filter is obtained.
The post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete curing, and a heat curing treatment is usually performed at 100 ° C. to 240 ° C., preferably 200 ° C. to 240 ° C.
This post-bake treatment is performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, or the like so that the coating film after development is in the above-described condition. be able to.
<<フォトレジスト層を形成する工程、レジストパターンを得る工程、およびドライエッチングする工程(ドライエッチング法でパターン形成する場合)>>
 ドライエッチングは、パターニングされたフォトレジスト層をマスクとしてエッチングガスを用いて行うことができる。具体的には、着色感光性樹脂組成物層を硬化して得られる着色層上にポジ型またはネガ型の感放射線性組成物を塗布し、これを乾燥させることによりフォトレジスト層を形成する。フォトレジスト層の形成においては、さらにプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジスト層の形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理(PEB)、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。
<< Step of Forming Photoresist Layer, Step of Obtaining Resist Pattern, and Step of Dry Etching (When Pattern is Formed by Dry Etching Method) >>
Dry etching can be performed using an etching gas with the patterned photoresist layer as a mask. Specifically, a positive or negative radiation sensitive composition is applied on a colored layer obtained by curing a colored photosensitive resin composition layer, and dried to form a photoresist layer. In the formation of the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment. In particular, as a process for forming the photoresist layer, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure (PEB) and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable.
 フォトレジストとしては、例えば、ポジ型の感放射線性組成物が用いられる。このポジ型の感放射線性組成物としては、紫外線(g線、h線、i線)、エキシマー・レーザー等を含む遠紫外線、電子線、イオンビームおよびX線等の放射線に感応するポジ型フォトレジスト用に好適なポジ型レジスト組成物が使用できる。放射線のうち、g線、h線、i線が好ましく、中でもi線が好ましい。
 具体的には、ポジ型の感放射線性組成物として、キノンジアジド化合物およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する組成物が好ましい。キノンジアジド化合物およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有するポジ型の感放射線性組成物は、500nm以下の波長の光照射によりキノンジアジド基が分解してカルボキシル基を生じ、結果としてアルカリ不溶状態からアルカリ可溶性になることを利用するものである。このポジ型フォトレジストは解像力が著しく優れているので、ICやLSI等の集積回路の作製に用いられている。キノンジアジド化合物としては、ナフトキノンジアジド化合物が挙げられる。市販品としては例えばFHi622BC」(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ社製)などが挙げられる。
As the photoresist, for example, a positive type radiation sensitive composition is used. As this positive type radiation sensitive composition, positive type photo sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays. A positive resist composition suitable for resist can be used. Of the radiation, g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
Specifically, as the positive radiation sensitive composition, a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin is preferable. A positive radiation-sensitive composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin indicates that a quinonediazide group is decomposed by irradiation with light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less to produce a carboxyl group, resulting in alkali-solubility from an alkali-insoluble state. It is what you use. Since this positive photoresist has remarkably excellent resolution, it is used for manufacturing integrated circuits such as ICs and LSIs. Examples of the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound. Examples of commercially available products include FHi622BC (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials).
 フォトレジスト層の厚みとしては、0.1~3μmが好ましく、0.2~2.5μmが好ましく、0.3~2μmがさらに好ましい。なお、フォトレジスト層の塗布による形成は、既述の着色層における塗布方法を用いて好適に行なえる。 The thickness of the photoresist layer is preferably from 0.1 to 3 μm, preferably from 0.2 to 2.5 μm, and more preferably from 0.3 to 2 μm. The formation of the photoresist layer by coating can be suitably performed using the coating method for the colored layer described above.
 次いで、フォトレジスト層を露光、現像することにより、レジスト貫通孔群が設けられたレジストパターン(パターニングされたフォトレジスト層)を形成する。レジストパターンの形成は、特に制限なく、従来公知のフォトリソグラフィーの技術を適宜最適化して行なうことができる。露光、現像によりフォトレジスト層に、レジスト貫通孔群が設けられることによって、次のエッチングで用いられるエッチングマスクとしてのレジストパターンが、着色層上に設けられる。 Next, by exposing and developing the photoresist layer, a resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer) provided with a group of resist through holes is formed. The formation of the resist pattern is not particularly limited, and can be performed by appropriately optimizing a conventionally known photolithography technique. By providing a resist through hole group in the photoresist layer by exposure and development, a resist pattern as an etching mask used in the next etching is provided on the colored layer.
 フォトレジスト層の露光は、所定のマスクパターンを介して、ポジ型またはネガ型の感放射線性組成物に、g線、h線、i線等、好ましくはi線で露光を施すことにより行なうことができる。露光後は、現像液で現像処理することにより、着色パターンを形成しようとする領域に合わせてフォトレジストが除去される。 The exposure of the photoresist layer is performed by exposing the positive-type or negative-type radiation-sensitive composition with g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern. Can do. After the exposure, the photoresist is removed in accordance with a region where a colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
 前記現像液としては、着色剤を含む着色層には影響を与えず、ポジレジストの露光部およびネガレジストの未硬化部を溶解するものであればいずれも使用可能であり、例えば、種々の有機溶剤の組み合わせやアルカリ性の水溶液を用いることができる。アルカリ性の水溶液としては、アルカリ性化合物を濃度が0.001~10質量%、好ましくは0.01~5質量%となるように溶解して調製されたアルカリ性水溶液が好適である。アルカリ性化合物は、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム,硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウム、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン等が挙げられる。尚、アルカリ性水溶液を現像液として用いた場合は、一般に現像後に水で洗浄処理が施される。 Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist without affecting the colored layer containing the colorant. Combinations of solvents and alkaline aqueous solutions can be used. As the alkaline aqueous solution, an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable. Examples of alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, Examples include pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene. In addition, when alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developing solution, generally a washing process is performed with water after development.
 次に、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして、着色層に貫通孔群が形成されるようにドライエッチングによりパターニングする。これにより、着色パターンが形成される。貫通孔群は、着色層に、市松状に設けられている。よって、着色層に貫通孔群が設けられてなる第1着色パターンは、複数の四角形状の第1着色画素を市松状に有している。 Next, using the resist pattern as an etching mask, patterning is performed by dry etching so that a through hole group is formed in the colored layer. Thereby, a colored pattern is formed. The through hole group is provided in a checkered pattern in the colored layer. Therefore, the first colored pattern in which the through hole group is provided in the colored layer has a plurality of square-shaped first colored pixels in a checkered pattern.
 ドライエッチングとしては、パターン断面をより矩形に近く形成する観点や支持体へのダメージをより低減する観点から、以下の形態で行なうのが好ましい。
 フッ素系ガスと酸素ガス(O)との混合ガスを用い、支持体が露出しない領域(深さ)までエッチングを行なう第1段階のエッチングと、この第1段階のエッチングの後に、窒素ガス(N)と酸素ガス(O)との混合ガスを用い、好ましくは支持体が露出する領域(深さ)付近までエッチングを行なう第2段階のエッチングと、支持体が露出した後に行なうオーバーエッチングとを含む形態が好ましい。以下、ドライエッチングの具体的手法、並びに第1段階のエッチング、第2段階のエッチング、およびオーバーエッチングについて説明する。
Dry etching is preferably performed in the following manner from the viewpoint of forming a pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
Using a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ), a first stage etching is performed to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and a nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed. The form containing these is preferable. Hereinafter, a specific method of dry etching and the first stage etching, second stage etching, and over-etching will be described.
 ドライエッチングは、下記手法により事前にエッチング条件を求めて行なう。
 (1)第1段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)と、第2段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)とをそれぞれ算出する。(2)第1段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間と、第2段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間とをそれぞれ算出する。(3)前記(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第1段階のエッチングを実施する。(4)前記(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施する。あるいはエンドポイント検出でエッチング時間を決定し、決定したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施してもよい。(5)前記(3)、(4)の合計時間に対してオーバーエッチング時間を算出し、オーバーエッチングを実施する。
Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
(1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively. (2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated. (3) The first-stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2). (4) The second stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2). Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time. (5) Overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4), and overetching is performed.
 前記第1段階のエッチング工程で用いる混合ガスとしては、被エッチング膜である有機材料を矩形に加工する観点から、フッ素系ガスおよび酸素ガス(O)を含むことが好ましい。また、第1段階のエッチング工程は、支持体が露出しない領域までエッチングする形態にすることで、支持体のダメージを回避することができる。また、前記第2段階のエッチング工程および前記オーバーエッチング工程は、第1段階のエッチング工程でフッ素系ガスおよび酸素ガスの混合ガスにより支持体が露出しない領域までエッチングを実施した後、支持体のダメージ回避の観点から、窒素ガスおよび酸素ガスの混合ガスを用いてエッチング処理を行なうのが好ましい。 The mixed gas used in the first stage etching step preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape. In addition, the first stage etching process can avoid damage to the support body by etching to a region where the support body is not exposed. The second etching step and the over-etching step may be performed by etching the region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas in the first etching process, and then damaging the support. From the viewpoint of avoidance, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
 第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量と、第2段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量との比率は、第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング処理による矩形性を損なわないように決定することが重要である。なお、全エッチング量(第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量と第2段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量との総和)中における後者の比率は、0%より大きく50%以下である範囲が好ましく、10~20%がより好ましい。エッチング量とは、被エッチング膜の残存する膜厚とエッチング前の膜厚との差から算出される量のことをいう。 It is important to determine the ratio between the etching amount in the first stage etching process and the etching amount in the second stage etching process so as not to impair the rectangularity due to the etching process in the first stage etching process. It is. The latter ratio in the total etching amount (the sum of the etching amount in the first-stage etching process and the etching amount in the second-stage etching process) is preferably in the range of more than 0% and not more than 50%. 10 to 20% is more preferable. The etching amount is an amount calculated from the difference between the remaining film thickness to be etched and the film thickness before etching.
 また、エッチングは、オーバーエッチング処理を含むことが好ましい。オーバーエッチング処理は、オーバーエッチング比率を設定して行なうことが好ましい。また、オーバーエッチング比率は、初めに行なうエッチング処理時間より算出することが好ましい。オーバーエッチング比率は任意に設定できるが、フォトレジストのエッチング耐性と被エッチングパターンの矩形性維持の点で、エッチング工程におけるエッチング処理時間の30%以下であることが好ましく、5~25%であることがより好ましく、10~15%であることが特に好ましい。 Further, the etching preferably includes an over-etching process. The overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first. The over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable, and 10 to 15% is particularly preferable.
 次いで、エッチング後に残存するレジストパターン(すなわちエッチングマスク)を除去する。レジストパターンの除去は、レジストパターン上に剥離液または溶剤を付与して、レジストパターンを除去可能な状態にする工程と、レジストパターンを洗浄水を用いて除去する工程とを含むことが好ましい。 Next, the resist pattern (that is, etching mask) remaining after etching is removed. The removal of the resist pattern preferably includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent on the resist pattern so that the resist pattern can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern using cleaning water.
 レジストパターン上に剥離液または溶剤を付与し、レジストパターンを除去可能な状態にする工程としては、例えば、剥離液または溶剤を少なくともレジストパターン上に付与し、所定の時間停滞させてパドル現像する工程を挙げることができる。剥離液または溶剤を停滞させる時間としては、特に制限はないが、数十秒から数分であることが好ましい。 Examples of the step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on the resist pattern so that the resist pattern can be removed include, for example, a step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on at least the resist pattern and stagnating for a predetermined time to perform paddle development Can be mentioned. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant, It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes.
 また、レジストパターンを洗浄水を用いて除去する工程としては、例えば、スプレー式またはシャワー式の噴射ノズルからレジストパターンに洗浄水を噴射して、レジストパターンを除去する工程を挙げることができる。洗浄水としては、純水を好ましく用いることができる。また、噴射ノズルとしては、その噴射範囲内に支持体全体が包含される噴射ノズルや、可動式の噴射ノズルであってその可動範囲が支持体全体を包含する噴射ノズルを挙げることができる。噴射ノズルが可動式の場合、レジストパターンを除去する工程中に支持体中心部から支持体端部までを2回以上移動して洗浄水を噴射することで、より効果的にレジストパターンを除去することができる。 Further, examples of the step of removing the resist pattern using the cleaning water include a step of removing the resist pattern by spraying the cleaning water onto the resist pattern from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle. As the washing water, pure water can be preferably used. Further, examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support. When the spray nozzle is movable, the resist pattern is more effectively removed by moving the support pattern from the center of the support to the end of the support more than twice during the process of removing the resist pattern and spraying the cleaning water. be able to.
 剥離液は、一般には有機溶剤を含有するが、無機溶媒をさらに含有してもよい。有機溶剤としては、例えば、1)炭化水素系化合物、2)ハロゲン化炭化水素系化合物、3)アルコール系化合物、4)エーテルまたはアセタール系化合物、5)ケトンまたはアルデヒド系化合物、6)エステル系化合物、7)多価アルコール系化合物、8)カルボン酸またはその酸無水物系化合物、9)フェノール系化合物、10)含窒素化合物、11)含硫黄化合物、12)含フッ素化合物が挙げられる。剥離液としては、含窒素化合物を含有することが好ましく、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物とを含むことがより好ましい。 The stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent. Examples of organic solvents include 1) hydrocarbon compounds, 2) halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, 3) alcohol compounds, 4) ether or acetal compounds, 5) ketones or aldehyde compounds, and 6) ester compounds. 7) polyhydric alcohol compounds, 8) carboxylic acids or acid anhydride compounds thereof, 9) phenol compounds, 10) nitrogen compounds, 11) sulfur compounds, and 12) fluorine compounds. The stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
 非環状含窒素化合物としては、水酸基を有する非環状含窒素化合物であることが好ましい。具体的には、例えば、モノイソプロパノールアミン、ジイソプロパノールアミン、トリイソプロパノールアミン、N-エチルエタノールアミン、N,N-ジブチルエタノールアミン、N-ブチルエタノールアミン、モノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミンなどが挙げられ、好ましくはモノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミンであり、より好ましくはモノエタノールアミン(HNCHCHOH)である。また、環状含窒素化合物としては、イソキノリン、イミダゾール、N-エチルモルホリン、ε-カプロラクタム、キノリン、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン、α-ピコリン、β-ピコリン、γ-ピコリン、2-ピペコリン、3-ピペコリン、4-ピペコリン、ピペラジン、ピペリジン、ピラジン、ピリジン、ピロリジン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-フェニルモルホリン、2,4-ルチジン、2,6-ルチジンなどが挙げられ、好ましくは、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチルモルホリンであり、より好ましくはN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)である。 The acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group. Specific examples include monoisopropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, triisopropanolamine, N-ethylethanolamine, N, N-dibutylethanolamine, N-butylethanolamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine. Preferably, they are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and more preferably monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH). Examples of cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ε-caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, α-picoline, β-picoline, γ-picoline, 2- Preferred examples include pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, and 2,6-lutidine. Are N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, more preferably N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP).
 剥離液は、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物とを含むことが好ましいが、中でも、非環状含窒素化合物として、モノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、およびトリエタノールアミンから選ばれる少なくとも1種と、環状含窒素化合物として、N-メチル-2-ピロリドンおよびN-エチルモルホリンから選ばれる少なくとも1種とを含むことがより好ましく、モノエタノールアミンとN-メチル-2-ピロリドンとを含むことがさらに好ましい。 The stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound. Among these, as the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound, at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and cyclic The nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
 剥離液で除去するときには、第1着色パターンの上に形成されたレジストパターンが除去されていればよく、第1着色パターンの側壁にエッチング生成物であるデポ物(析出物)が付着している場合でも、前記デポ物が完全に除去されていなくてもよい。デポ物とは、エッチング生成物が着色層の側壁に付着し堆積したものをいう。 When removing with a stripping solution, it is sufficient that the resist pattern formed on the first colored pattern is removed, and deposits (deposits) as etching products are attached to the side walls of the first colored pattern. Even in such a case, the deposit may not be completely removed. A deposit means an etching product deposited and deposited on the side wall of a colored layer.
 剥離液としては、非環状含窒素化合物の含有量が、剥離液100質量部に対して9質量部以上11質量部以下であって、環状含窒素化合物の含有量が、剥離液100質量部に対して65質量部以上70質量部以下であるものが望ましい。また、剥離液は、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物との混合物を純水で希釈したものが好ましい。 As the stripping solution, the content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by weight or more and 11 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution. On the other hand, what is 65 to 70 mass parts is desirable. Further, the stripping solution is preferably obtained by diluting a mixture of an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
 なお、本発明の製造方法は、必要に応じ、上記以外の工程として、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタの製造方法として公知の工程を有していてもよい。例えば、上述した、着色感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、露光工程およびパターン形成工程を行った後に、必要により、形成された着色パターンを加熱および/または露光により硬化する硬化工程を含んでいてもよい。 In addition, the manufacturing method of this invention may have a well-known process as a manufacturing method of the color filter for solid-state image sensors as a process other than the above as needed. For example, after performing the above-mentioned colored photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, exposure step and pattern forming step, a curing step of curing the formed colored pattern by heating and / or exposure may be included as necessary. Good.
 また、本発明に係る組成物を用いる場合、例えば、塗布装置吐出部のノズルや配管部の目詰まりや塗布機内への着色組成物や顔料の付着・沈降・乾燥による汚染等が生じる場合がある。そこで、本発明の組成物によってもたらされた汚染を効率よく洗浄するためには、前掲の本組成物に関する溶剤を洗浄液として用いることが好ましい。また、特開平7-128867号公報、特開平7-146562号公報、特開平8-278637号公報、特開2000-273370号公報、特開2006-85140号公報、特開2006-291191号公報、特開2007-2101号公報、特開2007-2102号公報、特開2007-281523号公報などに記載の洗浄液も本発明に係る組成物の洗浄除去として好適に用いることができる。
 上記のうち、アルキレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレートおよびアルキレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルが好ましい。
 これら溶媒は、単独で用いても2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。2種以上を混合する場合、水酸基を有する溶剤と水酸基を有しない溶剤とを混合することが好ましい。水酸基を有する溶剤と水酸基を有しない溶剤との質量比は、1/99~99/1、好ましくは10/90~90/10、さらに好ましくは20/80~80/20である。プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)とプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)の混合溶剤で、その比率が60/40であることが特に好ましい。なお、汚染物に対する洗浄液の浸透性を向上させるために、洗浄液には前掲の本組成物に関する界面活性剤を添加してもよい。
Further, when the composition according to the present invention is used, for example, clogging of a nozzle or a piping part of a coating apparatus discharge part, contamination due to adhesion, sedimentation, or drying of a colored composition or pigment in the coating machine may occur. . Therefore, in order to efficiently clean the contamination caused by the composition of the present invention, it is preferable to use the solvent related to the present composition as the cleaning liquid. Also, JP-A-7-128867, JP-A-7-146562, JP-A-8-278737, JP-A-2000-273370, JP-A-2006-85140, JP-A-2006-291191, The cleaning liquids described in JP2007-2101A, JP2007-2102A, JP2007-281523A, etc. can also be suitably used for cleaning and removing the composition according to the present invention.
Of the above, alkylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylates and alkylene glycol monoalkyl ethers are preferred.
These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When mixing 2 or more types, it is preferable to mix the solvent which has a hydroxyl group, and the solvent which does not have a hydroxyl group. The mass ratio of the solvent having a hydroxyl group and the solvent having no hydroxyl group is from 1/99 to 99/1, preferably from 10/90 to 90/10, more preferably from 20/80 to 80/20. In a mixed solvent of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) and propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), the ratio is particularly preferably 60/40. In addition, in order to improve the permeability of the cleaning liquid with respect to contaminants, a surfactant related to the present composition described above may be added to the cleaning liquid.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の組成物を用いているため、露光マージンに優れた露光ができる共に、形成された着色パターン(着色画素)は、パターン形状に優れ、パターン表面の荒れや現像部における残渣が抑制されていることから、色特性に優れたものとなる。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、CCD、CMOS等の固体撮像素子に好適に用いることができ、特に100万画素を超えるような高解像度のCCDやCMOS等に好適である。本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタは、例えば、CCDまたはCMOSを構成する各画素の受光部と、集光するためのマイクロレンズと、の間に配置されるカラーフィルタとして用いることができる。
Since the color filter of the present invention uses the composition of the present invention, the exposure can be performed with excellent exposure margin, and the formed colored pattern (colored pixel) is excellent in pattern shape, and the pattern surface is rough and developed. Since the residue in the portion is suppressed, the color characteristics are excellent.
The color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels. The color filter for a solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used as a color filter disposed between, for example, a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
 なお、本発明のカラーフィルタにおける着色パターン(着色画素)の膜厚としては、2.0μm以下が好ましく、1.0μm以下がより好ましく、0.7μm以下がさらに好ましい。
 また、着色パターン(着色画素)のサイズ(パターン幅)としては、2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.7μm以下が特に好ましい。
In addition, as a film thickness of the coloring pattern (color pixel) in the color filter of this invention, 2.0 micrometers or less are preferable, 1.0 micrometer or less is more preferable, and 0.7 micrometer or less is further more preferable.
Further, the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 μm or less.
[固体撮像素子]
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、既述の本発明のカラーフィルタを備える。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明におけるカラーフィルタが備えられた構成であり、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
[Solid-state imaging device]
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a configuration provided with the color filter in the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. .
 支持体上に、固体撮像素子(CCDイメージセンサー、CMOSイメージセンサー、等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、前記フォトダイオードおよび前記転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口したタングステン等からなる遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、前記デバイス保護膜上に、本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを有する構成である。
 さらに、前記デバイス保護層上であってカラーフィルタの下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。
A transfer electrode comprising a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support. Having a light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like that is opened only in the light-receiving part of the photodiode, and having a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving part, It is the structure which has the color filter for solid-state image sensors of this invention on a device protective film.
Further, a configuration having light collecting means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) on the device protective layer and under the color filter (on the side close to the support), or a structure having the light collecting means on the color filter Etc.
[画像表示装置]
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、前記固体撮像素子のみならず、液晶表示装置や有機EL表示装置などの、画像表示装置に用いることができ、特に液晶表示装置の用途に好適である。本発明のカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、表示画像の色合いが良好で表示特性に優れた高画質画像を表示することができる。
[Image display device]
The color filter of the present invention can be used not only for the solid-state imaging device but also for an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, and is particularly suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device. The liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image with a good display image color and excellent display characteristics.
 表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、(株)工業調査会 1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、(株)工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year). The liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置に用いてもよい。カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置については、例えば「カラーTFT液晶ディスプレイ(共立出版(株)1996年発行)」に記載されている。さらに、本発明はIPSなどの横電界駆動方式、MVAなどの画素分割方式などの視野角が拡大された液晶表示装置や、STN、TN、VA、OCS、FFS、およびR-OCB等にも適用できる。
 また、本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なCOA(Color-filter On Array)方式にも供することが可能である。COA方式の液晶表示装置にあっては、カラーフィルタ層に対する要求特性は、前述のような通常の要求特性に加えて、層間絶縁膜に対する要求特性、すなわち低誘電率および剥離液耐性が必要とされることがある。本発明のカラーフィルタにおいては、色相に優れた染料多量体を用いることから、色純度、光透過性などが良好で着色パターン(画素)の色合いに優れるので、解像度が高く長期耐久性に優れたCOA方式の液晶表示装置を提供することができる。なお、低誘電率の要求特性を満足するためには、カラーフィルタ層の上に樹脂被膜を設けてもよい。
 これらの画像表示方式については、例えば、「EL、PDP、LCDディスプレイ-技術と市場の最新動向-(東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門 2001年発行)」の43ページなどに記載されている。
The color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT liquid crystal display device. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Furthermore, the present invention is applied to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS and a pixel division method such as MVA, STN, TN, VA, OCS, FFS, and R-OCB. it can.
In addition, the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system. In the case of a COA type liquid crystal display device, the required characteristics for the color filter layer require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the stripping solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above. Sometimes. In the color filter of the present invention, since a dye multimer excellent in hue is used, the color purity, light transmittance, etc. are good and the color pattern (pixel) is excellent in hue, so the resolution is high and the long-term durability is excellent. A COA type liquid crystal display device can be provided. In order to satisfy the required characteristics of a low dielectric constant, a resin film may be provided on the color filter layer.
These image display methods are described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display-latest technology and market trends (issued in 2001 by Toray Research Center Research Division)".
 本発明におけるカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、本発明におけるカラーフィルタ以外に、電極基板、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、バックライト、スペーサ、視野角保障フィルムなど様々な部材から構成される。本発明のカラーフィルタは、これらの公知の部材で構成される液晶表示装置に適用することができる。これらの部材については、例えば、「’94液晶ディスプレイ周辺材料・ケミカルズの市場(島 健太郎 (株)シーエムシー 1994年発行)」、「2003液晶関連市場の現状と将来展望(下巻)(表良吉(株)富士キメラ総研、2003年発行)」に記載されている。
 バックライトに関しては、SID meeting Digest 1380(2005)(A.Konno et.al)や、月刊ディスプレイ 2005年12月号の18~24ページ(島 康裕)、同25~30ページ(八木隆明)などに記載されている。
In addition to the color filter of the present invention, the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film. The color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members. Regarding these components, for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
Regarding backlights, SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
 本発明におけるカラーフィルタを液晶表示装置に用いると、従来公知の冷陰極管の三波長管と組み合わせたときに高いコントラストを実現できるが、さらに、赤、緑、青のLED光源(RGB-LED)をバックライトとすることによって輝度が高く、また、色純度の高い色再現性の良好な液晶表示装置を提供することができる。 When the color filter according to the present invention is used in a liquid crystal display device, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue LED light sources (RGB-LED). By using as a backlight, a liquid crystal display device having high luminance and high color purity and good color reproducibility can be provided.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「%」および「部」は質量基準である。 The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “%” and “parts” are based on mass.
<分散剤(C-1)の合成>
 ガス導入管、コンデンサー、攪拌翼、及び温度計を備え付けた反応槽に、メチルメタクリレート80部、エチルアクリレート120部、及びメトキシプロピルアセテート40部を仕込み、窒素ガスで置換した。反応容器内を80℃に加熱して、3‐メルカプト‐1,2‐プロパンジオール4.4部を添加した後、そこへ2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.2部を20回に分けて30分ごとに加えた。反応容器内を80℃に維持したまま12時間反応させ、固形分測定により95%が反応したことを確認した。次に、トリメリット酸無水物12部、メトキシプロピルアセテート190部、及び、触媒として、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン0.40部を反応後の溶液に追加し、120℃で2時間反応させ、次いで80℃で5時間反応させ、90%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを滴定で確認した。得られた樹脂溶液を2gサンプリングし、180℃で20分間加熱乾燥して不揮発分を測定した。先に得られた樹脂溶液に、不揮発分が25質量%になるようにプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを添加し、固形分当たりの酸価が44mgKOH/g、数平均分子量が5200である芳香族カルボキシル基を有する分散剤(C-1)を得た。
<Synthesis of Dispersant (C-1)>
In a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, a condenser, a stirring blade, and a thermometer, 80 parts of methyl methacrylate, 120 parts of ethyl acrylate, and 40 parts of methoxypropyl acetate were charged and replaced with nitrogen gas. The reaction vessel was heated to 80 ° C., 4.4 parts of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol was added, and then 0.2 parts of 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile was added 20 times. And added every 30 minutes. It was made to react for 12 hours, maintaining the inside of reaction container at 80 degreeC, and it confirmed that 95% had reacted by solid content measurement. Next, 12 parts of trimellitic anhydride, 190 parts of methoxypropyl acetate, and 0.40 part of 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene as a catalyst were added to the solution after the reaction. The mixture was reacted at 120 ° C. for 2 hours and then at 80 ° C. for 5 hours, and it was confirmed by titration that 90% or more of the acid anhydride had been half-esterified. 2 g of the obtained resin solution was sampled and heated and dried at 180 ° C. for 20 minutes to measure the nonvolatile content. Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate is added to the previously obtained resin solution so that the nonvolatile content is 25% by mass, and the acid value per solid content is 44 mg KOH / g, and the aromatic carboxyl group has a number average molecular weight of 5200. Dispersant (C-1) having
<分散剤(C-2)の合成>
 ガス導入管、コンデンサー、攪拌翼、及び温度計を備え付けた反応槽に、メチルメタクリレート160部、エチルアクリレート40部、及びメトキシプロピルアセテート40部を仕込み、窒素ガスで置換した。反応容器内を80℃に加熱して、3‐メルカプト‐1,2‐プロパンジオール2.2部を添加した後、そこへ2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.2部を20回に分けて30分ごとに加えた。反応容器内を80℃に維持したまま12時間反応させ、固形分測定により95%が反応したことを確認した。次に、トリメリット酸無水物12部、メトキシプロピルアセテート190部、及び、触媒として、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン0.40部を反応後の溶液に追加し、120℃で2時間反応させ、次いで80℃で5時間反応させ、90%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを滴定で確認した。得られた樹脂溶液を約2gサンプリングし、180℃、20分間加熱乾燥して不揮発分を測定した。先に得られた樹脂溶液に、不揮発分が25質量%になるようにプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを添加し、固形分当たりの酸価が23mgKOH/g、数平均分子量が11000である芳香族カルボキシル基を有する分散剤(C-2)溶液を得た。
<Synthesis of Dispersant (C-2)>
In a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, a condenser, a stirring blade, and a thermometer, 160 parts of methyl methacrylate, 40 parts of ethyl acrylate, and 40 parts of methoxypropyl acetate were charged and replaced with nitrogen gas. Heat the inside of the reaction vessel to 80 ° C., add 2.2 parts of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol, and then add 0.2 part of 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile 20 times. And added every 30 minutes. It was made to react for 12 hours, maintaining the inside of reaction container at 80 degreeC, and it confirmed that 95% had reacted by solid content measurement. Next, 12 parts of trimellitic anhydride, 190 parts of methoxypropyl acetate, and 0.40 part of 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene as a catalyst were added to the solution after the reaction. The mixture was reacted at 120 ° C. for 2 hours and then at 80 ° C. for 5 hours, and it was confirmed by titration that 90% or more of the acid anhydride had been half-esterified. About 2 g of the obtained resin solution was sampled, heated and dried at 180 ° C. for 20 minutes, and the nonvolatile content was measured. Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate is added to the previously obtained resin solution so that the nonvolatile content is 25% by mass, and the acid value per solid content is 23 mg KOH / g, and the aromatic carboxyl group has a number average molecular weight of 11,000. Dispersant (C-2) solution having
<分散剤(C-3)の合成>
 特開2007-277514号公報の段落番号0334の記載を参照して合成した。
分散剤(C-3):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
 分散剤(C-3)の化学式中、aは、2.0、bは4.0、酸価は10mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量(Mw)は20000である。
また、a及びbは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a+b=6を満たす。
<Synthesis of Dispersant (C-3)>
The compound was synthesized with reference to the description in paragraph number 0334 of JP-A-2007-277514.
Dispersant (C-3):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
In the chemical formula of the dispersant (C-3), a is 2.0, b is 4.0, the acid value is 10 mgKOH / g, and the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is 20000.
Further, a and b each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses and satisfy a + b = 6.
<樹脂バインダー1の合成>
 セパラブル四口フラスコに、温度計、冷却管、窒素ガス導入管、攪拌装置を取り付けた反応容器に、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを入れ、反応容器に窒素ガスを導入しながら100℃に加熱して、同温度で滴下管よりベンジルメタクリレート123.3g、メタクリル酸25.8g、アゾビスイソブチロニトリル10.0gの混合物を1時間かけて滴下して重合反応を行った。
 得られた樹脂溶液を室温まで冷却した後、約3gサンプリングして180℃20分間加熱乾燥して不揮発分を測定した。先に合成した樹脂溶液に不揮発分が40質量%となるようにプロピレングリコールアセテートを添加して、樹脂バインダー1の溶液を得た。
<Synthesis of resin binder 1>
In a separable four-necked flask, a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, and a stirrer is charged with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and heated to 100 ° C. while introducing nitrogen gas into the reaction vessel, At the same temperature, a mixture of 123.3 g of benzyl methacrylate, 25.8 g of methacrylic acid, and 10.0 g of azobisisobutyronitrile was dropped from the dropping tube over 1 hour to carry out a polymerization reaction.
After cooling the obtained resin solution to room temperature, about 3 g was sampled and heated and dried at 180 ° C. for 20 minutes to measure the nonvolatile content. Propylene glycol acetate was added to the previously synthesized resin solution so that the nonvolatile content was 40% by mass to obtain a resin binder 1 solution.
<顔料分散組成物の製造>
 下記の組成の混合物を均一に攪拌混合した後、ビーズミルにより3時間混合・分散して顔料分散組成物1を調製した。
 ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料(C.I.ピグメントグリーン58)                        9.59質量部
 黄色顔料(C.I.ピグメントイエロー185)   4.11質量部
 下記色素誘導体(I-1)             1.37質量部
 分散剤(C-1)                 4.93質量部
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA) 80.0質量部
<Production of pigment dispersion composition>
A mixture having the following composition was uniformly stirred and mixed, and then mixed and dispersed for 3 hours by a bead mill to prepare Pigment Dispersion Composition 1.
Zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment (CI Pigment Green 58) 9.59 parts by weight Yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 185) 4.11 parts by weight The following dye derivative (I-1) 1.37 parts by weight Dispersant (C-1) 4.93 parts by mass Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 80.0 parts by mass
色素誘導体(I-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Dye derivative (I-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
<着色感光性樹脂組成物の調製>
 下記の組成の混合物を均一に攪拌混合して、着色感光性樹脂組成物を調製した。
 顔料分散組成物1               65.7質量部
 樹脂バインダー1               1.24質量部(40質量%樹脂溶液として)
 光重合開始剤(1.2-オクタンジオン,1-[4-(フェニルチオ)-,2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)](BASF社製、IRGACURE OXE01))                1.26質量部
 エチレン性不飽和化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレートのエチレンオキシド変性品(新中村化学工業株式会社製、NKエステル A-DPH-12E))     2.34質量部
 フッ素系界面活性剤(大日本インキ株式会社製、メガファックF-781F)                      0.02質量部
 p-メトキシフェノール          0.0003質量部
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)     29.44質量部
<Preparation of colored photosensitive resin composition>
A colored photosensitive resin composition was prepared by uniformly stirring and mixing a mixture having the following composition.
Pigment dispersion composition 1 65.7 parts by mass Resin binder 1 1.24 parts by mass (as 40% by mass resin solution)
Photopolymerization initiator (1.2-octanedione, 1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (O-benzoyloxime)] (manufactured by BASF, IRGACURE OXE01)) 1.26 parts by mass Ethylenically unsaturated compound (Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate modified with ethylene oxide (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E)) 2.34 parts by mass Fluorosurfactant (Dainippon Ink Co., Ltd., MegaFuck F- 781F) 0.02 parts by mass p-methoxyphenol 0.0003 parts by mass Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 29.44 parts by mass
 組成内容を下記表1の組成に変えた以外は、上述の着色感光性樹脂組成物1と同様の方法で、着色感光性樹脂組成物2~15を調製した。なお、着色感光性樹脂組成物2~12で用いた誘導体A、誘導体(I-2)、誘導体(II-1)、および誘導体(II-2)は以下の構造式で表される。 Colored photosensitive resin compositions 2 to 15 were prepared in the same manner as the colored photosensitive resin composition 1 except that the composition content was changed to the composition shown in Table 1 below. The derivative A, derivative (I-2), derivative (II-1), and derivative (II-2) used in the colored photosensitive resin compositions 2 to 12 are represented by the following structural formula.
誘導体A(富士フイルムファインケミカルズ(株)製):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Derivative A (Fuji Film Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd.):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
誘導体(I-2):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Derivative (I-2):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
誘導体(II-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Derivative (II-1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
誘導体(II-2):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Derivative (II-2):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
<評価>
<<残渣>>
上記で得られた実施例及び比較例の着色感光性樹脂組成物を下塗り層付シリコンウェハ上に塗布後の膜厚が0.8μmになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、100℃のホットプレートを用いて120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行った。
 次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を使用して、365nmの波長で1.4μm四方のベイヤーパターンマスクを通してパターンサイズが1.4μm四方になるように露光量を調整して露光した。
 その後、露光された塗布膜が形成されているガラスウェハをTMAH 0.3%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、さらに純水にて水洗し、200℃のホットプレートを用いて300秒間加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行い、1.4μm四方のベイヤーパターンが形成された単色カラーフィルタを得た。
 得られた1.4μm四方のベイヤーパターンに対して、測長SEM(S-4800、日立社製)を用いて、パターン周辺の残渣を観察し、リソグラフィーの良好性を評価した。
~判定基準~
5:残渣は観察されない。
4:残渣がわずかに観察される。
3:残渣が観察されるが、実用上問題ないレベルである。
2:残渣が観察され、実用できないレベルである。
1:パターン周辺の下地上一面に残渣が観察される。
<Evaluation>
<< residue >>
The colored photosensitive resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples obtained above were applied onto a silicon wafer with an undercoat layer using a spin coater so that the film thickness after application was 0.8 μm, and hot at 100 ° C. Heat treatment (pre-baking) was performed for 120 seconds using a plate.
Next, using an i-line stepper exposure device FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), the exposure amount is adjusted so that the pattern size becomes 1.4 μm square through a 1.4 μm square Bayer pattern mask at a wavelength of 365 nm. And exposed.
Thereafter, the glass wafer on which the exposed coating film was formed was subjected to paddle development for 60 seconds at 23 ° C. using a TMAH 0.3% aqueous solution. After that, rinse with a spin shower, rinse with pure water, heat treatment (post-bake) for 300 seconds using a 200 ° C. hot plate, and a monochromatic color with a 1.4 μm square Bayer pattern formed A filter was obtained.
With respect to the obtained 1.4 μm square Bayer pattern, using a length measuring SEM (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.), the residue around the pattern was observed to evaluate the goodness of lithography.
~ Criteria ~
5: No residue is observed.
4: A residue is slightly observed.
3: Although a residue is observed, it is a level which is satisfactory practically.
2: A residue is observed and is a level which cannot be used practically.
1: Residue is observed on the entire surface below the pattern.
<<パターン直線性>>
上記で得られたパターン基盤を、測長SEM(S-4800、日立社製)を用いて、上部から観察した。
~判定基準~
5:図1(a)のようにパターンの一辺が直線である。
4:図1(b)のようにパターンの角がやや丸まっている。
3:図1(c)のようにパターンの一辺がやや丸まっている。
2:図1(d)のようにパターンが丸まっている。
1:図1(e)のようにパターンが丸い。
<< Pattern linearity >>
The pattern substrate obtained above was observed from above using a length measuring SEM (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi).
~ Criteria ~
5: One side of the pattern is a straight line as shown in FIG.
4: The corners of the pattern are slightly rounded as shown in FIG.
3: One side of the pattern is slightly rounded as shown in FIG.
2: The pattern is rounded as shown in FIG.
1: The pattern is round as shown in FIG.
<<安定性>>
上記で得られた実施例及び比較例の着色感光性樹脂組成物を室温で3ヶ月経時させた後の粘度変化を評価した。
5:経時前後の粘度変化が3.0%以下である。
4:経時前後の粘度変化が3.0%を超え5.0%以下である。
3:経時前後の粘度変化が5.0%を超え10.0%以下である。
2:経時前後の粘度変化が10.0%を超え30.0%以下である。
1:経時前後の粘度変化が30.0%を超える。
<< Stability >>
The changes in viscosity after the above-obtained colored photosensitive resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were aged at room temperature for 3 months were evaluated.
5: Viscosity change before and after aging is 3.0% or less.
4: The viscosity change before and after aging is more than 3.0% and 5.0% or less.
3: The viscosity change before and after aging is more than 5.0% and 10.0% or less.
2: The viscosity change before and after aging is more than 10.0% and 30.0% or less.
1: Viscosity change before and after aging exceeds 30.0%.
<<輝度ムラ>>
 上記で得られた実施例及び比較例の着色感光性樹脂組成物を、ガラス基板上に乾燥後の膜厚が0.8μmになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、100℃で120秒間プリベークして着色塗膜を得た。
 得られた各着色塗膜を光学顕微鏡の観測レンズと光源との間に設置して光を観測レンズに向けて照射し、倍率が1000倍のデジタルカメラが設置された光学顕微鏡を用いてその透過光状態を観察した。光学顕微鏡に設置されたデジタルカメラには128万画素のCCDが搭載されており、透過光状態にある着色塗膜表面を当該デジタルカメラで撮影した。撮影画像は8ビットのビットマップ形式でデジタル変換したデータ(デジタル画像)として保存した。
 なお、着色塗膜の被膜表面の撮影は任意に選択した20の領域に対して行った。また、デジタル変換したデータは、撮影画像をRGBの3原色それぞれの輝度を0~255までの256階調の濃度分布として数値化して保存した。
 次いで、保存されたデジタル画像について、1つの格子サイズが実基板上の0.5μm四方に相当するように、格子状に区分し、一つの区画内での輝度を平均化した。本実施例においては、128万画素のデジタルカメラで光学1000倍の画像を撮影したため、実基板上の0.5μmは撮影画像上の0.5mmとなり、ディスプレイ上における画像サイズが452mm×352mmであったことから、一つの領域における総区画数は636416個であった。
 各領域の全区画について、任意の1区画とそれに隣接する全ての隣接区画の平均輝度とを計測した。隣接区画の平均輝度との差が5%以上の区画を有意差区画と認定し、全領域の有意差区画の平均総数を算出した。この数値が小さいほど、隣接する区画との濃度差が小さく、輝度ムラが少なく、カラーフィルタとしての特性に優れる事を表す。
~判定基準~
5:有意差区画数が2000以下である。
4:有意差区画数が2001~3000である。
3:有意差区画数が3001~5000である。
2:有意差区画数が5001~10000である。
1:有意差区画数が10001以上である。
<< Luminance unevenness >>
The colored photosensitive resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples obtained above were applied on a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.8 μm, and prebaked at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds. Thus, a colored coating film was obtained.
Each colored coating obtained was placed between the observation lens and the light source of the optical microscope, irradiated with light toward the observation lens, and transmitted through an optical microscope in which a digital camera with a magnification of 1000 was installed. The light state was observed. The digital camera installed in the optical microscope is equipped with a CCD with 1.28 million pixels, and the surface of the colored coating film in the transmitted light state was photographed with the digital camera. The photographed image was stored as digitally converted data (digital image) in an 8-bit bitmap format.
In addition, imaging | photography of the coating film surface of a colored coating film was performed with respect to 20 area | regions selected arbitrarily. In addition, the digitally converted data was digitized and stored as a density distribution of 256 gradations in which the luminance of each of the three primary colors RGB was 0 to 255.
Next, the stored digital image was divided into a grid shape so that one grid size corresponds to 0.5 μm square on the actual substrate, and the luminance in one section was averaged. In this example, since a 1.times.820,000 pixel digital camera took an image with a magnification of 1000 times, 0.5 μm on the actual substrate was 0.5 mm on the photographed image, and the image size on the display was 452 mm × 352 mm. Therefore, the total number of sections in one area was 636416.
For all the sections in each region, an arbitrary luminance and the average luminance of all adjacent sections adjacent to it were measured. A section having a difference from the average brightness of the adjacent section of 5% or more was recognized as a significant difference section, and the average total number of significant difference sections in all regions was calculated. The smaller the numerical value, the smaller the density difference between adjacent sections, the less the luminance unevenness, and the better the characteristics as a color filter.
~ Criteria ~
5: The number of significant difference sections is 2000 or less.
4: The number of significant difference compartments is 2001 to 3000.
3: The number of significant difference compartments is 3001 to 5000.
2: The number of significant difference compartments is 5001 to 10,000.
1: The number of significant difference sections is 10001 or more.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000072
 上記表1において、各記号は以下の化合物を意味する。
PG58:ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料(C.I.ピグメントグリーン58)
PY139:イソインドリン系黄色顔料(C.I.ピグメントイエロー139)
PY150:ニッケルアゾ系黄色顔料(C.I.ピグメントイエロー150)
PY185:イソインドリン系黄色顔料(C.I.ピグメントイエロー185)
PG36:ハロゲン化銅フタロシアニン顔料(C.I.ピグメントグリーン36)
無置換Znフタロシアニン顔料:ハロゲン化されていない亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料
In Table 1 above, each symbol means the following compound.
PG58: zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment (CI Pigment Green 58)
PY139: Isoindoline yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 139)
PY150: Nickel azo yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 150)
PY185: Isoindoline yellow pigment (CI Pigment Yellow 185)
PG36: Copper halide phthalocyanine pigment (CI Pigment Green 36)
Unsubstituted Zn phthalocyanine pigment: non-halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment
 上記表1に示す結果より、フタロシアニン顔料として、非ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニンやハロゲン化銅フタロシアニンを用いた場合(比較例1~5)、パターン直線性、安定性、および輝度ムラが大きく劣っていることがわかった。また、本発明で用いる色素誘導体や分散剤を用いない場合(比較例4~5)、リソグラフィー、パターン直線性、安定性、および輝度ムラが大きく劣っていることがわかった。
 これらに対し、例えば実施例に示す本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、本発明の組成物に必須の成分である(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料と(B)特定構造の色素誘導体を含むため、リソグラフィー、パターン直線性、安定性、および輝度ムラが大幅に改善されていることがわかる。
From the results shown in Table 1 above, when non-halogenated zinc phthalocyanine or halogenated copper phthalocyanine is used as the phthalocyanine pigment (Comparative Examples 1 to 5), pattern linearity, stability, and luminance unevenness are greatly inferior. I understood. It was also found that lithography, pattern linearity, stability, and luminance unevenness were greatly inferior when the pigment derivative or dispersant used in the present invention was not used (Comparative Examples 4 to 5).
On the other hand, for example, the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention shown in Examples includes (A) a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment and (B) a dye derivative having a specific structure, which are essential components for the composition of the present invention. It can be seen that lithography, pattern linearity, stability, and luminance unevenness are greatly improved.

Claims (16)

  1. (A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、(B-1)下記一般式(I)で表される色素誘導体および/または(B-2)下記一般式(II)で表される色素誘導体、(C)分散剤、(D)光重合開始剤、ならびに(E)重合性化合物を含有し、前記(C)分散剤の含有量が顔料100質量部に対し、20~40質量部である着色感光性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     一般式(I)中、Dyeはn価の有機色素残基を表し、Xは単結合、-CONH-Y-、-SONH-Y-または-CHNHCOCHNH-Y-を表し、Yは置換基を有していても良いアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表し、Yは-NH-または-O-を表し、Zは、nが1を表す場合は水酸基、アルコキシ基、下記一般式(III)で表される基、または-NH-X-Dyeを表し、Xは一般式(I)中のXと同義であり、nが2~4の整数を表す場合はそれぞれ水酸基、アルコキシ基、または下記一般式(III)で表される基を表し、RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。mは1~6の整数を表し、nは1~4の整数を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数のX、Y、R、およびRは、それぞれ、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
     一般式(III)中、Yは-NH-または-O-を表す。RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していても良いアルキル基を表し、RとRが互いに結合して窒素原子を含むヘテロ環を形成してもよい。mは1~6の整数を表す。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     一般式(II)中、Dyeは置換基を有していてもよいキノフタロン残基を表し、Xは、-NR’SO-、-SONR’-、-CONR’-、-CHNR’COCHNR’-、または-NR’CO-を表し、Xは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が4~20の複素芳香環基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-または-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。Xは、-NR’-または-O-を表す。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。AおよびBは、それぞれ、下記一般式(1)で表される基、下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH-R、-OR、-NR1011、-Cl、-Fおよび-X-X-X-Dyeから選ばれる基を表し、Rは置換されていてもよい含窒素複素環残基を表し、R、R10、R11は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20アルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、nは0~20の整数を表す。AおよびBのいずれか一方は、下記一般式(1)で表される基、下記一般式(2)で表される基、-O-(CH)n-R、-ORまたは-NR1011であり、tは1~3の整数を表す。tが2以上の場合、複数のX、X、X、A、およびBは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     一般式(1)中、Yは-NR’-または-O-を表し、Yは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、これらの基は、-NR’-、-O-、-SO-、-CO-から選ばれる2価の連結基で相互に結合されていてもよい。R’は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。RおよびRはそれぞれ、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。RとRが一体となって複素環構造を形成してもよく、当該複素環構造は、更なる窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子を含んでも、置換基を有していてもよい。
    一般式(2)中、Zはトリアジン環と窒素原子を結ぶ単結合、-NR’-、-NR’-G-CO-、-NR’-G-CONR’’-、-NR’-G-SO-、-NR’-G-SONR’’-、-O-G-CO-、-O-G-CONR’-、-O-G-SO-または-O-G-SONR’-を表し、Gは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキレン基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニレン基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリーレン基を表し、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表す。R、R、R、およびRはそれぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が6~20のアリール基を表し、Rは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数が2~20のアルケニル基を表す。
    (A) a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment, (B-1) a dye derivative represented by the following general formula (I) and / or (B-2) a dye derivative represented by the following general formula (II), (C) A colored photosensitive resin comprising a dispersant, (D) a photopolymerization initiator, and (E) a polymerizable compound, wherein the content of the (C) dispersant is 20 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Composition.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In general formula (I), Dye represents an n-valent organic dye residue, and X represents a single bond, —CONH—Y 2 —, —SO 2 NH—Y 2 —, or —CH 2 NHCOCH 2 NH—Y 2 —. Y 2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group which may have a substituent, Y 1 represents —NH— or —O—, and Z represents a hydroxyl group or an alkoxy group when n represents 1. Represents a group represented by the following general formula (III), or —NH—X-Dye, where X is the same as X in the general formula (I), and n represents an integer of 2 to 4, A hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or a group represented by the following general formula (III) is represented. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 are bonded to each other. Thus, a heterocycle containing a nitrogen atom may be formed. m represents an integer of 1 to 6, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4. When n is 2 or more, the plurality of X, Y 1 , R 1 , and R 2 may be the same or different.
    In general formula (III), Y 3 represents —NH— or —O—. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom. m represents an integer of 1 to 6.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In the general formula (II), Dye represents an optionally substituted quinophthalone residue, and X 1 represents —NR′SO 2 —, —SO 2 NR′—, —CONR′—, —CH 2 NR′COCH 2 NR′— or —NR′CO—, wherein X 2 may have a substituent, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent Represents a heteroaromatic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and these groups are bonded to each other by a divalent linking group selected from —NR′—, —O—, —SO 2 — or —CO—. May be. X 3 represents —NR′— or —O—. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. A and B are each a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n —R 8 , —OR 9 , —NR 10 R 11 represents a group selected from —Cl, —F and —X 3 —X 2 —X 1 —Dye, R 8 represents an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing heterocyclic residue, R 9 , R 10 R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or a substituent. An aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, and n represents an integer of 0 to 20. One of A and B is a group represented by the following general formula (1), a group represented by the following general formula (2), —O— (CH 2 ) n—R 8 , —OR 9 or — NR 10 R 11 and t represents an integer of 1 to 3. When t is 2 or more, the plurality of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , A, and B may be the same or different.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In general formula (1), Y 1 represents —NR′— or —O—, and Y 2 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and these groups are represented by —NR′—, —O—, —SO They may be bonded to each other through a divalent linking group selected from 2- and -CO-. R ′ has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. And an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present. R 1 and R 2 each represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 1 and R 2 may be combined to form a heterocyclic structure, and the heterocyclic structure may contain a further nitrogen atom, oxygen atom or sulfur atom, or may have a substituent.
    In the general formula (2), Z 1 is a single bond connecting a triazine ring and a nitrogen atom, —NR′—, —NR′—G—CO—, —NR′—G—CONR ″ —, —NR′—G —SO 2 —, —NR′—G—SO 2 NR ″ —, —O—G—CO—, —O—G—CONR′—, —O—G—SO 2 — or —O—G—SO 2 represents NR′—, G represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, an alkenylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent. Represents an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may be present, R ′ and R ″ are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituted group. An alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may have a substituent, or 2 carbon atoms that may have a substituent. Represents an alkenyl group having 20 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and R 7 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, Alternatively, it represents an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  2. さらに、黄色顔料を含む、請求項1に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 Furthermore, the colored photosensitive resin composition of Claim 1 containing a yellow pigment.
  3. 前記黄色顔料が、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150および/またはC.I.ピグメントイエロー185である、請求項2に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 The yellow pigment is C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 and / or C.I. I. The colored photosensitive resin composition according to claim 2, which is CI Pigment Yellow 185.
  4. 前記(C)分散剤が、片末端に水酸基を有するビニル系重合体の該水酸基とトリカルボン酸無水物またはテトラカルボン酸二無水物とを反応してなる、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 4. The dispersant according to claim 1, wherein the dispersant (C) is obtained by reacting the hydroxyl group of a vinyl polymer having a hydroxyl group at one end with a tricarboxylic acid anhydride or a tetracarboxylic dianhydride. The colored photosensitive resin composition described in 1.
  5. 一般式(I)中、Dyeがベンズイミダゾロン骨格を有するモノアゾ色素を有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein in the general formula (I), Dye has a monoazo dye having a benzimidazolone skeleton.
  6. 一般式(II)中、前記キノフタロン残基が、下記一般式(II-1)で表される、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     一般式(II-1)中、DおよびEはそれぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、DおよびEが結合するベンゼン環とともに形成される、置換基を有してもよい芳香環基または複素環基、ヒドロキシル基、炭素数1~3のアルコキシル基、カルボキシル基あるいはその塩、炭素数1~20のエステル、炭素数1~20のアミド、スルホン基あるいはその塩、スルファモイル基、-NR’R’’-、ニトロ基から選ばれるいずれかの基を表す。式中、R’およびR’’は、それぞれ、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数2~20のアルケニル基または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。pは0~4の整数を表し、qは4-pで算出される整数を表す。*は、一般式(II)におけるXとの結合部位を表す。
    The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein, in the general formula (II), the quinophthalone residue is represented by the following general formula (II-1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    In general formula (II-1), D and E each have a substituent formed with a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a benzene ring to which D and E are bonded. Good aromatic or heterocyclic group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, carboxyl group or salt thereof, ester having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, amide having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, sulfone group or salt thereof, sulfamoyl Represents any group selected from a group, —NR′R ″ —, and a nitro group. In the formula, each of R ′ and R ″ is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a group or a substituent. p represents an integer of 0 to 4, and q represents an integer calculated by 4-p. * Represents a binding site with X 1 in the general formula (II).
  7. 一般式(II)中、AおよびBは、前記一般式(1)で表される基または前記一般式(2)で表される基を表し、かつ、同一の基である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 In the general formula (II), A and B represent the group represented by the general formula (1) or the group represented by the general formula (2), and are the same group. 7. The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of 6 above.
  8. 前記(A)ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料が、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58である、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 The (A) halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment is C.I. I. The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is CI Pigment Green 58.
  9. 前記組成物中の全固形分に対する、前記着色剤の合計量が、40質量%以上である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the total amount of the colorant is 40% by mass or more based on the total solid content in the composition.
  10. カラーフィルタの着色領域形成に用いられる請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物。 The colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, which is used for forming a colored region of a color filter.
  11. 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜。 A cured film obtained by curing the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  12. 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物を支持体上に適用して着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程と、前記着色感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むカラーフィルタの製造方法。 Applying the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10 on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer; and patterning the colored photosensitive resin composition layer. A method for producing a color filter, comprising: a step of exposing in a shape; and a step of developing and removing an unexposed portion to form a colored pattern.
  13. 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性樹脂組成物を支持体上に適用して着色感光性樹脂組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程、
    前記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、
    露光および現像することにより前記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、および
    前記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして前記着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
    Applying the colored photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10 on a support to form a colored photosensitive resin composition layer and curing to form a colored layer;
    Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
    A method for producing a color filter, comprising: a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern; and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
  14. 請求項11に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ、または請求項12または13に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法によって製造したカラーフィルタ。 The color filter which has the cured film of Claim 11, or the color filter manufactured by the manufacturing method of the color filter of Claim 12 or 13.
  15. 請求項14に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to claim 14.
  16. 請求項14に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。 An image display device comprising the color filter according to claim 14.
PCT/JP2014/069023 2013-08-05 2014-07-17 Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device WO2015019819A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-162162 2013-08-05
JP2013162162A JP6147135B2 (en) 2013-08-05 2013-08-05 Colored photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015019819A1 true WO2015019819A1 (en) 2015-02-12

Family

ID=52461158

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/069023 WO2015019819A1 (en) 2013-08-05 2014-07-17 Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6147135B2 (en)
TW (1) TW201506537A (en)
WO (1) WO2015019819A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111522199A (en) * 2020-04-21 2020-08-11 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Light resistor, preparation method thereof and display device
US20200348595A1 (en) * 2018-01-23 2020-11-05 Jsr Corporation Composition, film, and production method of patterned substrate
CN112739726A (en) * 2018-09-26 2021-04-30 富士胶片株式会社 Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6634753B2 (en) * 2015-09-17 2020-01-22 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition for color filter, method for producing photosensitive coloring composition, and color filter
JP6767747B2 (en) * 2016-01-15 2020-10-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing cured film, light-shielding film, color filter and solid-state image sensor
TWI704186B (en) * 2016-02-15 2020-09-11 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 Colored curable composition, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and method for manufacturing cured film
TWI829777B (en) * 2018-10-15 2024-01-21 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 Structure, solid imaging element and image display device
WO2022202204A1 (en) * 2021-03-22 2022-09-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007156395A (en) * 2005-11-11 2007-06-21 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Color filter
JP2009031723A (en) * 2007-02-14 2009-02-12 Fujifilm Corp Color filter and method of manufacturing the same, and solid-state imaging apparatus
JP2010204231A (en) * 2009-03-02 2010-09-16 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Color composition for color filter, and color filter
JP2011102945A (en) * 2009-11-12 2011-05-26 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter
JP2011112672A (en) * 2009-11-24 2011-06-09 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Method for producing green pigment dispersion for color filter, green pigment dispersion for color filter produced by the same, green-colored resist for the color filter, colored layer, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP2012053278A (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-15 Fujifilm Corp Colored photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing color filter, color filter and liquid crystal display device
JP2014035351A (en) * 2012-08-07 2014-02-24 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Colored composition for color filter, and color filter

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007156395A (en) * 2005-11-11 2007-06-21 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Color filter
JP2009031723A (en) * 2007-02-14 2009-02-12 Fujifilm Corp Color filter and method of manufacturing the same, and solid-state imaging apparatus
JP2010204231A (en) * 2009-03-02 2010-09-16 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Color composition for color filter, and color filter
JP2011102945A (en) * 2009-11-12 2011-05-26 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter
JP2011112672A (en) * 2009-11-24 2011-06-09 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Method for producing green pigment dispersion for color filter, green pigment dispersion for color filter produced by the same, green-colored resist for the color filter, colored layer, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP2012053278A (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-15 Fujifilm Corp Colored photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing color filter, color filter and liquid crystal display device
JP2014035351A (en) * 2012-08-07 2014-02-24 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Colored composition for color filter, and color filter

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200348595A1 (en) * 2018-01-23 2020-11-05 Jsr Corporation Composition, film, and production method of patterned substrate
CN112739726A (en) * 2018-09-26 2021-04-30 富士胶片株式会社 Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device
CN112739726B (en) * 2018-09-26 2023-09-19 富士胶片株式会社 Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device
CN111522199A (en) * 2020-04-21 2020-08-11 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Light resistor, preparation method thereof and display device
CN111522199B (en) * 2020-04-21 2023-11-28 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Photoresist, preparation method thereof and display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201506537A (en) 2015-02-16
JP6147135B2 (en) 2017-06-14
JP2015031857A (en) 2015-02-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6333604B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6147143B2 (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6096146B2 (en) Colored composition, colored cured film, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP5623958B2 (en) Radiation-sensitive composition, pattern forming method, color filter and method for producing the same, and solid-state imaging device
JP6147135B2 (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2015166779A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for forming pattern, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and infrared sensor
JP5657442B2 (en) Colored radiation-sensitive composition, pattern forming method, color filter, method for producing the color filter, and solid-state imaging device
JP6166711B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP5743588B2 (en) Colored radiation-sensitive composition, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
JP6591540B2 (en) Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, infrared cut filter, infrared transmission filter, pattern forming method and apparatus
JP2015030742A (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid state image sensor and image display device
KR102146683B1 (en) Colored radiation-sensitive composition and color filter using the same
JP2015151530A (en) Composite and production method of the same, colored composition, cured film, color filter, production method of color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device, as well as laminate
WO2016072259A1 (en) Colored curable composition, color filter, pattern formation method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP2015068945A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, infrared transmission filter and method for manufacturing the same, infrared sensor, and color filter
KR20120075359A (en) Titanium black dispersion composition for forming light blocking film and method of producing the same, black radiation-sensitive composition, black cured film, solid-state imaging element, and method of producing black cured film
JP2013054079A (en) Photocurable composition, color filter, manufacturing method of the same, and solid imaging element
JP5679860B2 (en) Colored radiation-sensitive composition, color filter, method for producing the color filter, and solid-state imaging device
JP6559300B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP2013210542A (en) Method of manufacturing color filter, and color filter, solid-state imaging device and liquid crystal display device manufactured by using the same
JP2012201643A (en) Method for producing carboxylic acid, method for producing dipyrromethene compound, colored radiation-sensitive composition, color filter, solid-state image sensing device, and liquid crystal display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14833885

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14833885

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1